Mitsubishi Electronics Diamond WD 57831 User Manual

DLP™ HIGH-DEFINITION  
TELEVISION  
MODELS  
WD-57831  
WD-65831  
WD-73831  
OWNER’S GUIDE  
For questions:  
-
-
-
Call Consumer Relations at 800-332-2119.  
E-mail us at [email protected].  
Visit our website at www.mitsubishi-tv.com.  
For information on Demo Mode and System Reset, please see the back cover.  
To order replacement or additional remote controls, lamp cartridges, or Owner’s Guides, visit  
our website at www.mitsuparts.com or call 800-553-7278.  
Guidelines for setting up and using your new widescreen TV start on page 34.  
5.  
Our Thanks...  
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi as your premier Home Entertainment provider  
This Owner’s Guide describes the features and functions of your Mitsubishi  
widescreen, high definition TV. We urge you to examine this Owner’s Guide to  
become familiar with the innovative features and operations this unique television  
offers.  
The very core of our corporate philosophy is to provide our customers with the  
very best. Our development team at Mitsubishi has worked to provide you with  
a television that defines “state-of-the-art,” with the capability to meet your needs  
now and in the future.  
Whether this is your first Mitsubishi electronic product, or an addition to your  
Mitsubishi collection, we believe you and your family will continue to enjoy your  
Mitsubishi home theater for many years.  
Thank you,  
Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.  
For Your Records  
Record the model number, serial number, and purchase date of your TV. The model and serial numbers are on the  
back of the TV. Refer to this page when requesting assistance with this TV.  
MODEL NUMBER (check one):  
WD-57831  
WD-65831  
WD-73831  
SERIAL NUMBER  
PURCHASE DATE  
Retailer Information  
RETAILER NAME  
LOCATION  
Contents  
Important Information About Your TV  
General Warnings and Cautions, Notes on Installation and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Cleaning Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Important Safeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Chapter 1: Television Overview  
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Special Features of Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
TV Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
TV Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
CableCARD™ Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Chapter 2: TV Connections  
Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Digital Video and Home Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Standard Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, or Other Device with S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Wall Outlet Cable (no cable box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
H
DMI Device (Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, DVD Player, or Other Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
DVI Video Device (Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, DVD Player, or Other Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
A/V Receiver (Sound System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Older Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Camcorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
IR Emitter NetCommand® and TV Guide On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Chapter 3: TV Setup  
Guidelines for Setting Up and Using Your New Widescreen TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
When You First Power On the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Using the TV’s Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
When You First Connect a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Initial NetCommand® Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Additional Setup Using the NetCommand Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Chapter 4: TV Operation and Features  
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Choosing a Program Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
ChannelView™ Channel Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
TV Signals and Display Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Memory Card Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Chapter 5: TV Menu Settings  
3D Graphical  
Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
NetCommand Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Record Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Captions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Parental Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Setting a Pass Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Lock TV by Time and Front-Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Rating Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Bypassing the Ratings Lock and Lock by Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
V-Chip Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Movie Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Audio/Video Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Video Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Chapter 6: NetCommand Functions  
NetCommand-Controlled Devices and the Input Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
NetCommand-Controlled Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Using IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Chapter 7: Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Video Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Connecting a Computer to the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Computer Display Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Appendices  
Appendix A: Bypassing the Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Trademark and License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Mitsubishi TV Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Mitsubishi DLP™ Projection Television Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
6
Important Information About Your TV  
Important Information About Your TV  
WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and/or birth defects or  
other reproductive harm.  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.  
TV WEIGHT: This TV is heavy! Exercise extreme care when lifting or moving it. Lift or move the TV with a minimum  
of two adults. To prevent damage to the TV, avoid jarring or moving it while it is turned on. Always power off your TV  
before moving it.  
Installation Notes  
Stand Requirement  
CAUTION: Use these Mitsubishi TV models only with the  
Mitsubishi stand models shown here. Other stands can  
result in instability and possibly cause injury.  
TV Model  
WD-57831  
WD-65831  
WD-73831  
Stand Model  
MB-57GB  
MB-65GB  
MB-73DGB  
Custom cabinet installation must allow for proper air circulation around the television.  
NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER: THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER’S  
ATTENTION TO ARTICLE 820-40 OF THE NEC THAT PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR THE PROPER GROUNDING AND,  
IN PARTICULAR, SPECIFIES THAT THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF  
THE BUILDING, AS CLOSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE ENTRY AS PRACTICAL.  
Operating Notes  
operate. TV Guide On Screen does not provide program  
listings for satellite TV systems.  
Standby Fan  
Lamp Replacement  
For lamp-replacement instructions, see Appendix C.  
When the TV is off, you may hear a low-power standby  
fan. This is normal operation. The fan cools advanced  
circuitry in this TV that must continue to operate even  
when the TV is turned off.  
To Order a Replacement Lamp Under Warranty  
Call (800) 553-7278. Please have model number, serial  
number, and TV purchase date available.  
Demo Mode  
This TV has a demo mode for use in retail stores. To turn  
off demo mode:  
Important: All lamps replaced under warranty must be  
returned to Mitsubishi where they will be inspected for  
defect verification.  
1. Press MENU  
.
2. When the Main menu appears with Setup highlighted,  
To Purchase a Replacement Lamp After Warranty  
Visit our website at www.mitsuparts.com or call  
(800) 553-7278. Order new lamp part number  
915P049020.  
press ENTER.  
3. When the Setup menu opens, press to highlight the  
on-screen Demo Mode Off button.  
4. Press ENTER  
.
TV Guide On Screen® Access Requirements  
TV Guide On Screen listings are not provided by  
Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. Operation of  
TV Guide On Screen requires over-the-air or cable access  
to stations carrying TV Guide On Screen program listings.  
If listings are not available in your area or become discon-  
tinued by the local provider, TV Guide On Screen will not  
Important Information About Your TV  
7
Cleaning Recommendations  
TV Software  
Normally, light dusting with a dry, non-scratching duster  
will keep your TV clean. If cleaning beyond this is needed,  
please use the following guidelines:  
Unauthorized Software  
Do not attempt to update the software of this TV with  
software or cards that are not provided by or authorized  
by Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. Non-autho-  
rized software may damage the TV and will not be covered  
by the warranty.  
First, turn off the TV and unplug the power cord from the  
power outlet.  
Top and Sides of the TV  
Gently wipe down your TV with a soft, non-abrasive  
cloth such as cotton flannel or a clean cloth diaper,  
lightly moistened with water. Dry with a second dry,  
soft, non-abrasive cloth.  
For oily dirt, add a few drops of mild liquid detergent,  
such as dishwashing detergent, to the water used to  
moisten the cloth. Rinse with a second cloth moist-  
ened only with water. Dry with a third dry, soft, non-  
abrasive cloth.  
Screen  
Follow the instructions for the top and sides, wiping  
gently in an up and down motion, following the  
grooves in the screen.  
Clean the entire screen evenly, not just sections of the  
screen.  
Do not allow liquid to drip down the grooves of the  
screen, as some liquid may enter the TV through the  
gap between the screen and screen frame.  
You may purchase Mitsubishi Screen Cleaner, part  
number CLEANER-VSS, by calling (800) 553-7278.  
General Cleaning Precautions  
DO NOT allow liquid to enter the TV through the venti-  
lation slots or any crevice.  
DO NOT use any strong or abrasive cleaners, as these  
can scratch the surfaces.  
DO NOT use any cleaners containing ammonia,  
bleach, alcohol, benzene, or thinners, as these can  
dull the surfaces.  
DO NOT spray liquids or cleaners directly on the TV’s  
surfaces.  
DO NOT scrub or rub the TV harshly. Wipe it gently.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use any kind of abrasive cleaner  
on the surface of the TV screen.  
8
Important Information About Your TV  
Important Safeguards  
Please read the following safeguards for your TV and retain for future reference. Always follow all warnings and instruc-  
tions marked on the television.  
1. Read, Retain and Follow All Instructions  
Read all safety and operating instructions before operating the TV. Retain the safety and operating instructions  
for future reference. Follow all operating and use instructions.  
2. Heed Warnings  
Adhere to all warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions.  
3. Cleaning  
Unplug the TV from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid, abrasive or aerosol cleaners. Cleaners  
can permanently damage the cabinet and screen. Use a lightly dampened cloth for cleaning.  
4. Attachments and Equipment  
Never add any attachments and/or equipment without approval of the manufacturer as such additions may  
result in the risk of fire, electric shock or other personal injury.  
5. Water and Moisture  
Do not use the TV where contact with or immersion in water is possible. Do not use near bath tubs, wash  
bowls, kitchen sinks, laundry tubs, swimming pools, etc.  
6. Accessories  
Do not place the TV on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, or table. The TV may fall,  
causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the TV. Use only with a  
cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the  
TV. Any mounting of the TV should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should  
use mounting accessories recommended by the manufacturer.  
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive  
force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.  
7. Ventilation  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the TV and to  
protect it from overheating. Do not block these openings or allow them to be obstructed by placing the TV on  
a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. Nor should it be placed over a radiator or heat register. If the TV is to  
be placed in a rack or bookcase, ensure that there is adequate ventilation and that the manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions have been adhered to.  
8. Power Source  
This TV should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not  
sure of the type of power supplied to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.  
9. Grounding or Polarization  
This TV is equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug having one blade wider than the other. This  
plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try revers-  
ing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not  
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.  
10. Power-Cord Protection  
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed  
upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the TV.  
11. Lightning  
For added protection for this TV during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long  
period of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent  
damage to the TV due to lightning and power-line surges.  
Important Information About Your TV  
9
Important Safeguards, continued  
12. Power Lines  
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or  
power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,  
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be  
fatal.  
13. Overloading  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.  
14. Object and Liquid Entry  
Never push objects of any kind into this TV through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or  
short-out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on or into the TV.  
E XAMP LE OF ANTE NNA G R OUNDING  
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding  
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the TV, be sure  
ANTE NNA  
LE AD IN WIR E  
the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some pro-  
tection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.  
G R OUND C LAMP  
ANTE NNA  
DIS C HAR G E UNIT  
(NE C AR TIC LE 810-20)  
Article 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-2002,  
E LE C TR IC  
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast  
S E R VIC E  
G R OUNDING  
E QUIP ME NT  
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna  
C ONDUC TOR S  
(NE C AR TIC LE 810-21)  
discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna dis-  
charge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements  
G R OUND C LAMP S  
for the grounding electrode.  
P OWE R S E R VIC E G R OUNDING  
E LE C TR ODE S YS TE M  
NE C — NATIONAL E LE C TR IC AL C ODE  
(NE C AR T 250, P AR T H)  
16. Servicing  
Do not attempt to service this TV yourself as opening or removing  
covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service person-  
nel.  
17. Damage Requiring Service  
Unplug the TV from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following condi-  
tions:  
(a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.  
(b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the TV.  
(c) If the TV has been exposed to rain or water.  
(d) If the TV does not operate normally by following the operating instructions, adjust only those controls that  
are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage  
and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the TV to its normal operation.  
(e) If the TV has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
(f) When the TV exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service.  
18. Replacement Parts  
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by  
the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in  
fire, electric shock or other hazards.  
19. Safety Check  
Upon completion of any service or repair to the TV, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.  
20. Heat  
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves or other prod-  
ucts (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
1
Television Overview  
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Special Features of Your TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
TV Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
TV Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
CableCARD™ Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
12  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
1
Package Contents  
Please take a moment to review the following list of  
items to ensure that you have received everything.  
2
1. Standard Remote Control  
2. Two AA Batteries  
3. Small Remote Control  
4. Two AAA Batteries  
3
5. Four-Ended IR Emitter  
6. TV Guide On Screen®  
Interactive Program  
Guide User’s Manual  
4
7. Owner’s Guide  
5
8. Quick Reference Guide  
9. Product Registration  
Card  
High-Definition Video Inputs  
Special Features of Your TV  
Your new high-definition widescreen television has many  
special features that make it the perfect center of your  
home entertainment system, including:  
Three Component Video Inputs. Also called Y/Pb/  
Pr inputs, these inputs receive standard analog video  
formats of 480i, 480p, 720p, and 1080i high-definition  
signals. This provides a high level of flexibility when  
connecting DVD players/recorders, cable boxes, and  
satellite receivers.  
High Definition DLP™ Display System  
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV uses Texas Instruments  
most advanced Digital Light Processing™ technology  
for rear-projection televisions. This TV is truly a high-  
performance multimedia monitor uniquely capable of both  
stunning high-definition video images and clear, detailed,  
high-resolution images from a personal computer.  
Two HDMI Inputs that accept digital 480i, 480p,  
720p, 1080i, and 1080p video signals plus PCM digital  
stereo signals. Used with an adapter, these inputs  
also accept compatible DVI video signals. HDMI  
inputs provide additional high-performance, high-  
definition connections for maximum flexibility in your  
choice of home theater products. The HDMI inputs are  
HDCP copy-protection compatible.  
16:9 Widescreen Picture Format  
Enjoy a full theatrical experience in the comfort of your  
home. View pictures as film directors intended them.  
Digital TV broadcasts, DVDs and newer video game con-  
soles support this widescreen format.  
Three IEEE 1394 Digital Interfaces that receive and  
send compressed digital signals, including high-  
definition signals, along with digital audio and control  
signals between devices such as the TV, digital cable  
boxes, and D-VHS digital video recorders.  
Integrated HDTV Tuner  
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV has an internal HDTV  
tuner able to receive both over-the-air HDTV broadcasts  
(received via an antenna) and non-scrambled digital cable  
broadcasts, including non-scrambled HDTV cable pro-  
gramming.  
ClearThought® Easy Connect Auto Input  
Sensing  
ClearThought® automatically recognizes when you plug in  
an input and prompts you to assign a name to it. The TV  
ignores any unused inputs, so the result is an uncluttered  
Input Selection menu where you can easily find and select  
connected devices by name.  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
13  
Memory Card Reader  
Digital Cable Ready (CableCARD™)  
You can display a slide show of your favorite JPEG pic-  
tures or listen to MP3 or WMA audio selections recorded  
on compatible memory cards.  
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV is “Plug-and-Play”  
digital cable ready. It can descramble a cable provider’s  
one-way digital signals with the use of a CableCARD  
security module. The CableCARD is used in place of a  
traditional cable box to access digital cable programming  
(including high definition). Contact your local cable pro-  
vider for availability information and service details.  
PC DVI-I Input for Computer Video  
Connect your personal computer’s HDMI or DVI video  
output to this jack to display computer images on the TV.  
®
NetCommand Home Network Control  
System  
TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program  
Guide System  
Your widescreen Mitsubishi HDTV offers a new level  
of networking that can seamlessly integrate selected  
older A/V products with new and future digital products.  
NetCommand supports IEEE 1394 connections, Audio  
Video Control system (AV/C), 5C copy protection, and  
IR (infrared) control of selected older products, such as  
VCRs, DVD players, cable boxes, and satellite receivers.  
NetCommand can learn remote control signals directly  
from many devices, allowing you to create a customized  
NetCommand-controlled home-theater system.  
An eight-day on-screen program guide for cable, over-  
the-air, and CableCARD™ reception. This subscription-  
free guide system lists regular, digital, and high-definition  
programming. Note that when the system is first set up, it  
may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program  
listings and then it may take up to one week to receive all  
eight days of TV program listings.  
14  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
Input 3  
TV Front Panel  
INPUT 3 provides an easily accessible set of standard  
audio/video jacks and IEEE 1394 input/output. These  
jacks allow for convenient connection of a camcorder or  
other audio/video device. Note that if you connect to the  
S-VIDEO jack, the VIDEO jack is deactivated.  
Control Panel  
The shaded buttons on the front control panel duplicate  
keys on the remote control. The upper labels show control  
functions when no TV menus are displayed; the lower  
labels indicate functions when TV menus are displayed or  
when a special function has been activated. See “Remote  
Control Overview” in chapter 4, “TV Operation and Fea-  
tures,” for further details on the functions of these buttons.  
Memory Card Reader  
The memory card reader has four card slots that accept a  
variety of popular memory card types. The reader lets you  
view JPEG pictures from many digital cameras and allows  
you to listen to MP3 or WMA audio files recorded from  
computers or other digital recording devices.  
System Reset Button  
If the TV does not respond to the  
remote control, front panel controls,  
The card slots are designed for the specific types of  
cards listed below. Other cards or objects should not be  
inserted into the slots as this may damage the TV. See the  
discussion of memory cards in chapter 4 “TV Operation  
and Features” for details about JPEG, MP3 and WMA file  
types that are compatible with the TV.  
4:45&.  
ꢀꢀ3&4&5  
or will not power on/off, press the  
SYSTEM RESET button on the front panel  
with a pointed object, such as the point  
of a pencil or end tip of a paperclip.  
The green LED will flash quickly for  
about one minute. When the green LED stops flashing,  
you may turn on the TV. The changes you made most  
recently, before using SYSTEM RESET, may be lost.  
Card Compatibility  
A. CARD 1  
SmartMedia™  
MultiMediaCard™  
Secure Digital (SD)  
B. CARD 2  
A/V Reset  
CompactFlash® (Types I and II)  
Microdrive®  
C. CARD 3  
D. CARD 4  
If you wish to reset the A/V (Audio/Video) settings back to  
the factory defaults:  
Memory Stick PRO™  
Memory Stick™  
To reset all settings at once, press GUIDE and FORMAT on  
the front panel at the same time.  
To reset the defaults for individual devices, use the  
A/V Memory Reset selection on the Audio/Video  
menu.  
$"3%ꢀꢁ4NBSU.FEJB5.  
$"3%ꢀꢄꢀ .VMUJNFEJBꢀ$BSE5.  
4%ꢀ$BSE  
A
C
B
Front Panel Controls and Indicators  
D
1. Shaded buttons are duplicates of  
$"3%ꢀꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ1305.  
¥
$"3%ꢀꢂꢀ $PNQBDU'MBTI  
keys on the remote control  
¥
.JDSP%SJWF  
2. POWER/TIMER indicator—lit  
during normal operation; flashing  
when auto-on TV Timer is set  
4
2
1
3
3. LAMP indicator shows lamp condi-  
tion (usually off during normal TV  
operation)  
4. STATUS indicator (off during  
normal TV operation)  
Lift cover to use features on  
the front panel.  
5. SYSTEM RESET (see description  
this page)  
1
5
Right: INPUT 3  
and controls on  
front panel  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
15  
Front-Panel Indicators  
Off  
Steady On  
Slow Blinking  
Fast Blinking  
LAMP Indicator  
LED Color TV Condition  
Additional Information  
Normal TV on or standby condition. Normal operation.  
None  
TV just powered off and lamp is  
cooling.  
Starts to blink 30 seconds after turning off TV. TV can be turned  
on before blinking starts or after blinking stops, but not while the  
indicator is blinking. Normal operation.  
Green  
1. Lamp access door is open or  
not secure.  
TV will not operate until lamp access door is secure. See Appen-  
dix C for installation information.  
Yellow  
Red  
TV will not operate without a lamp. See Appendix C for installation  
information.  
2. No lamp installed.  
Lamp no longer illuminates and has Replace the lamp. The TV will not operate when the lamp no  
reached the end of the lamp life.  
longer illuminates. See Appendix C for installation information.  
STATUS Indicator  
LED Color TV Condition  
Additional Information  
Normal operation.  
Normal TV on or standby condition.  
None  
Yellow  
Red  
TV will not operate when the ambient room temperature is too  
high. Turn off the TV and wait until the room temperature drops.  
Room temperature is too high.  
TV may require service.  
Turn off the TV and unplug the set from the AC power source.  
Wait one minute and then plug the set back in.  
If the LED is still on, contact your dealer or a Mitsubishi  
Authorized Service Center. See www.mitsubishi-tv.com or call  
1-800-332-2119 to receive Authorized Service Center information.  
POWER/TIMER Indicator  
LED Color TV Condition  
Additional Information  
Normal operation.  
TV is powered off.  
None  
Normal operation.  
TV is powered on.  
Green  
Green  
1. TV just plugged into AC outlet.  
2. AC just restored after power  
failure.  
3. TV Rebooting after System  
Reset used.  
Wait until blinking stops before turning on (approximately 1  
minute). Normal operation.  
4. TV Rebooting after power  
fluctuation or receiving abnor-  
mal digital signals from digital  
channel, CableCARD™, or  
digital device.  
5. You have begun the procedure  
to update software from an  
For detailed information, see the instructions that accompany the  
authorized software update. Important: Do not use unauthorized  
authorized flash memory device. software at any time.  
TV powered off and auto-on timer  
is set.  
Normal operation. TV can be turned on at any time.  
Green  
16  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
TV Back Panel  
3
6
4
10  
11  
$0.10/&/5  
.0/*503  
065  
4ꢀ7*%&0  
7*%&0  
7*%&0  
:
1C  
1S  
)%.*ꢄ$0.1"5*#*-*5:  
-&'5  
ꢄꢄ7*%&0ꢉꢄꢇꢊꢋJꢅꢇꢊꢋQꢅꢌꢂꢋQꢅꢁꢋꢊꢋJꢅꢁꢋꢊꢋQ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
$0.10/&/5ꢄ$0.1"5*#*-*5:  
ꢄꢄ7*%&0ꢉꢄꢇꢊꢋJꢅꢇꢊꢋQꢅꢌꢂꢋQꢅꢁꢋꢊꢋJ  
"6%*0ꢀ  
-&'5  
.0/0ꢈ  
%7*ꢀ*ꢄ1$ꢄ$0.1"5*#*-*5:  
ꢄꢄ3&'&3ꢄ50ꢄ08/&34ꢄ(6*%&ꢍ  
)%.*ꢄꢅꢄ%7*ꢄ"6%*0  
3*()5  
-&'5  
"6%*0ꢀ  
3*()5  
"6%*0  
-&'5  
.0/0ꢈ  
"6%*0  
065  
"6%*0  
3*()5  
*/165  
3*()5  
64&ꢄ8*5)  
"/5ꢄꢂꢄꢅꢄ"69  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
$BCMF$"3%™  
1
-&'5  
1$ꢀ%7*  
"6%*0  
3*()5  
R
TM  
13  
2
$BCMF$"3%™64&ꢄ8*5)ꢄ"/5ꢄꢁꢄꢄꢄꢄ$"3%ꢄ501  
)%.*  
4&37*$&  
1035  
1$ꢄꢀꢄ%7*  
*&&&ꢄꢁꢃꢆꢇ  
%*(*5"-  
"6%*0  
065  
12  
9
5
7
8
1. ANT 1/MAIN, ANT 2/AUX (Antenna)  
2. CableCARD™ Slot  
If you are connecting an antenna, direct cable without  
a cable box, or are using cable with a CableCARD™,  
connect the main antenna or cable source to  
The CableCARD access card from your cable TV service  
provider is inserted into this slot. When inserting, ensure  
that the top of the card faces in the direction indicated by  
ANT 1/MAIN  
.
CARD TOP  
.
ANT 1/MAIN and ANT 2/AUX can each receive both  
digital and analog over-the-air channels from a VHF/UHF  
antenna or non-scrambled digital/analog cable source.  
If your cable company is not currently offering CableCARD  
access cards, use the cable box provided and authorized by  
your local cable company to view scrambled channels.  
ANT 1/MAIN and CableCARD™  
3. INPUT 1 and 2 Inputs  
Use ANT 1/MAIN to receive premium subscription cable  
TV service authorized by the CableCARD™ access card.  
The CableCARD access card is provided by your local  
cable company. ANT 2/AUX can continue to receive  
over-the-air or non-scrambled cable signals when ANT 1  
is used for CableCARD™ service.  
(Audio and Video)  
INPUT 1 and  
2
can be used to connect a VCR, Super  
VHS (S-VHS) VCR, DVD player, standard satellite receiver,  
or other A/V device to the TV. INPUT 3 is a third set  
of jacks located on the front of the TV for convenience.  
Please note that if S-VIDEO and VIDEO are both avail-  
able, you must choose to connect only one.  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
17  
jacks allow you to send left and right analog audio from  
your computer to the TV.  
TV Back Panel, continued  
4. COMPONENT Inputs  
9. IEEE 1394/DTVLINK™  
(Audio and Video)  
Y Pb Pr (480i/480p/720p/1080i)  
Use these jacks to connect devices with component video  
outputs, such as DVD players, external HDTV receivers, or  
compatible video game systems. Please see Appendix B  
for signal compatibility.  
These jacks allow the TV to connect to external IEEE 1394  
digital products by means of a single cable. See chapter  
6, “NetCommand Operations” for detailed information  
regarding IEEE 1394 connections and recording.  
10. MONITOR OUT  
Use these composite video and left/right audio jacks  
to send analog video and audio signals to an external  
recording device such as a VCR. To make recordings  
from this output, the TV must be in normal full-screen  
mode rather than in Split Screen mode.  
5. HDMI™ 1 and 2  
Do not connect a computer to either TV HDMI jack.  
The HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports  
uncompressed standard and high-definition digital video  
formats and PCM digital audio format. For PC video, use  
the PC-DVI input instead.  
You can watch another device while recording, but  
not another channel.  
From this output you can record audio and video  
Use these inputs to connect to EIA/CEA-861 compliant  
devices such as a high-definition receiver or DVD player.  
These inputs support 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p  
video formats.  
signals from ANT 1  
IEEE 1394 devices.  
Digital signals from ANT 1  
,
ANT 2  
,
INPUT 1-3, and  
,
ANT 2, and IEEE  
1394 devices are converted to analog video and  
audio signals.  
These inputs can also accept DVI video inputs. To connect  
a DVI input, use an HDMI-to-DVI adapter or cable plus  
analog audio cables. Connect the analog audio cables to  
the HDMI/DVI AUDIO inputs on the TV to receive left  
and right stereo audio from your DVI device.  
Some signals cannot be recorded because of  
copy-protection flags in the content.  
11. AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT  
These inputs are HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Copy Pro-  
AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT jacks send analog audio of  
the program currently shown on the screen to an A/V sur-  
round sound receiver or stereo system. Digital audio from  
digital channels, FireWire® (IEEE 1394/DTVLink) devices  
and HDMI devices is converted to analog audio by the TV.  
If using an analog A/V receiver or stereo system, this is  
the only audio connection needed between it and the TV.  
tection) compliant.  
These inputs are  
ability with other products certified by Simplay™.  
certified for proper interoper-  
6. HDMI/DVI AUDIO  
Use these analog audio inputs when connecting DVI  
video devices to the TV’s HDMI jacks. Unlike HDMI,  
DVI does not carry audio information on the same cable.  
For analog audio from a personal computer, use the  
PC-DVI AUDIO jacks instead.  
12. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
This output sends Dolby Digital or PCM digital audio to your  
digital A/V surround sound receiver. Analog audio from  
analog channels and devices is converted by the TV to  
PCM digital audio. If you have a digital A/V receiver, in most  
cases this is the only audio connection needed between the  
TV and your A/V receiver.  
7. PC-DVI  
Do not connect a TV video source to the PC-DVI input.  
PC-DVI is a DVI-I input compatible with both DVI-A  
(analog) and DVI-D (digital) inputs. Connect your personal  
computer’s HDMI, DVI, or VGA video output to this jack.  
An adapter or converter cable may be required. Please  
see Appendix B for signal compatibility. To hear audio  
from the computer, connect analog audio cables from the  
computer to the PC-DVI AUDIO jacks.  
13. IR Emitter NetCommand®  
IR Emitters connected to this jack are used by the TV’s  
NetCommand system to control external IR remote con-  
trolled analog devices such as cable boxes, VCRs, DVDs,  
satellite receivers and audio receivers. This system also  
coordinates with the TV Guide On Screen® system to  
control cable boxes and to activate the record feature of  
your VCR.  
8. PC-DVI AUDIO  
Use the PC-DVI AUDIO jacks in conjunction with the  
PC-DVI video input from a personal computer. These  
18  
Chapter 1. Television Overview  
CableCARD™ Menu  
CableCARD™ Technology  
CableCARD is a nationwide system standard that allows  
your local cable TV provider to supply you with an access  
card customized to your account. This card allows your  
TV to receive, decode, and unscramble the premium  
digital channels included in your cable TV subscription  
without the use of a cable box. When you move to a new  
cable provider’s area, return the CableCARD to the original  
cable provider and get a new card from your new provider.  
CableCARD menu  
Network Setup  
CableCARD(tm) Status  
CableCARD(tm) Pairing  
Conditional Access  
Please note that CableCARD is a relatively new technology  
and your local cable provider may not currently be offer-  
ing this service. As time passes, this system will become  
broadly supported by most cable providers.  
Press ENTER to select an application. Press EXIT key to exit.  
Sample CableCARD menu  
To display the CableCARD menu with links to applications  
from your cable provider:  
The CableCARD system is unidirectional, meaning your  
cable provider can send updates to the TV, but the TV  
cannot send signals back. As a result, certain advanced  
and interactive digital cable services, such as requests for  
video-on-demand and pay-per-view programs, a cable  
operator’s enhanced program guide, and data-enhanced  
television services may require use of a set-top box  
instead. For more information, call your local cable opera-  
tor.  
1. While watching CableCARD, press INPUT to open the  
Input Selection menu.  
2. With the CableCARD icon highlighted, press MENU to  
open the CableCARD menu.  
3. Press  
to highlight a link (blue text), then press  
ENTER to access the linked page.  
4. To redisplay the CableCARD menu, repeat steps 1 and  
2.  
Digital cable channels authorized by the CableCARD are  
available on the Firewire® IEEE 1394 network and can be  
shared by other products on the network. You may be  
unable to record or copy some digital programs, however,  
because of copy restrictions set by the content or copy-  
right owners.  
5. Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.  
If there are technical problems with the CableCARD, an  
error screen automatically displays with information that  
may be needed by your cable provider when you call them  
for assistance.  
Moving Through Other CableCARD Screens  
Using a CableCARD™  
In addition to CableCARD menus, other CableCARD  
application screens may display and require you to make  
additional selections. When using these screens on your  
Mitsubishi television:  
Power on the TV and insert the CableCARD into the  
CableCARD slot with the top of the card oriented as indi-  
cated by CARD TOP . When the initial screen dis-  
plays, write down the information that appears and have it  
ready when calling your cable provider.  
Blue text denotes a link to another screen. Press ENTER  
to move to the next application. Screens without blue  
text contain no links.  
In order to start cable  
service for this device, please contact  
your cable provider  
1-800-xxx-xxxx  
CableCARD(tm): xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx-x  
Host: xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx-x  
You cannot move backward through the links. To exit  
the CableCARD system, press EXIT. The CANCEL key may  
not work with some CableCARD screens.  
All information on these application screens is provided by  
your local cable company. Contact your cable provider if  
you have any problems with the application screen displays.  
Data: xxx-xxx-xxx-xx  
UnitAddress: xx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxx  
Press EXIT to exit.  
IMPORTANT  
Sample CableCARD initial screen. Record the information  
before contacting your cable provider.  
Most CableCARD screens show only status or  
diagnostic information and do not allow you  
to make changes. These screens are mean-  
ingful only to your local cable provider.  
To review the information later, press MENU and when the  
Main menu appears, press 9 9 9 to re-display the screen.  
Note: CableCARD™ requires the TV’s Fast Power On  
setting. If you insert a CableCARD™, the TV will  
automatically override a Low Power setting and  
change to the Fast Power On setting.  
IMPORTANT  
To use a CableCARD, connect the primary  
incoming cable to ANT 1/MAIN on the TV.  
2
TV Connections  
Connection Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Digital Video and Home Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video . . . . 21  
Standard Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, or Other Device with  
S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Wall Outlet Cable (no cable box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
H
DMI Device (Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, DVD Player, or  
Other Device). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
DVI Video Device (Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, DVD Player,  
or Other Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
A/V Receiver (Sound System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Older Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Camcorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
IR Emitter NetCommand® and TV Guide On Screen. . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
20  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
Connection Types  
Video and Combined Audio/Video Connections  
These descriptions apply to TV video only and do not cover signals from personal computers.  
Picture Quality  
(most sources)  
Figures  
(not to scale)  
Name  
Signal Type  
Additional Information  
Carries digital audio and  
uncompressed digital video on  
a single one-way cable.  
Digital audio  
and video  
HDMI  
Carries uncompressed digital  
video and analog video on a  
single one-way cable; requires  
separate audio connections.  
Best  
Digital and  
analog video  
(carry high-  
definition video  
when available)  
DVI  
Y Pb Pr RCA-style connectors  
are colored green, blue, and red.  
Carries analog high-definition  
and standard-definition signals.  
Component Video Analog video  
Carries analog standard-defi-  
nition signals. Provides better  
quality video than composite or  
RF coaxial video.  
Good  
Fair  
S-Video  
Analog video  
Analog video  
RCA-style connector, usually  
colored yellow. Carries analog  
standard-definition signals.  
Composite Video  
Carries compressed digital  
video and audio as well as  
device control signals on a  
single two-way cable.  
IEEE 1394  
(FireWire®)  
Digital audio  
and video  
Fair to Best  
(depending on  
source; carry  
all qualities of  
signals)  
RF Coaxial Video Analog and  
(from antenna or  
direct cable)  
Carries audio and video on a  
single cable.  
digital audio  
and video  
Note: Only some TV signals are high-definition signals. To view  
high-definition programming from your cable or satellite  
provider, you must subscribe to the provider’s high-definition  
service. Some over-the-air broadcasts are in high-definition  
and can be received with a high-quality antenna suited to  
your location.  
Audio Connections  
There are two types of audio connections used on this TV. Refer to the table below.  
Figures  
(not to scale)  
Audio Connection  
Additional Information  
RCA-style connectors usually colored white for left and  
red for right stereo audio. For monaural sound (all speak-  
ers playing the same sound), use only the white connector.  
Left/Right Analog  
Stereo Audio  
RCA-style connector usually colored orange. Use to send  
digital audio from the TV to your digital A/V receiver for  
surround-sound effects. Usually the only audio connec-  
tion required between the TV and the A/V receiver.  
Digital Audio (Coaxial)  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
21  
Digital Video and Home Recording  
The table below will help you decide which type of connection to use for digital video. Digital video comes to your  
home in a compressed state, whether received on recorded media (e.g., disc) or broadcast over the air, over cable, or  
via satellite. Some compressed digital video is available for recording as noted in the table.  
Connection Type into the TV  
Effect on Home Recording  
HDMI or DVI  
You cannot record the resultant uncompressed video sent to the TV  
via HDMI or DVI.  
Compressed video is converted to  
uncompressed form by an external device  
such as a cable box, satellite receiver, or  
DVD player before it is sent to the TV on an  
HDMI or DVI cable.  
IEEE 1394 (FireWire®) Connections  
Your TV can receive and decode digital  
channels, MPEG2 compressed digital video,  
and Dolby Digital audio.  
You can record compressed digital video either  
on compatible digital recorders as digital signals using IEEE 1394  
connections  
converted to analog signals and recorded as standard-definition  
composite video from the MONITOR OUT jack  
You may be unable to record some programming because of copy restric-  
tions added by the content owners.  
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite  
$"#-&ꢅ*/ꢅPSꢅ  
4"5&--*5&ꢅ*/  
ꢃꢁ  
Receiver with Component Video  
"6%*0  
:
If your cable box or satellite receiver has HDMI or DVI  
outputs, use the connections for HDMI or DVI video  
devices described later in this chapter.  
-
1C  
1S  
3
*ODPNJOHꢅ  
"OUFOOBꢅPSꢅ  
$BCMF  
Required: RCA component video cables, left/right analog  
audio cables.  
A coaxial splitter, available at most electronic supply  
stores, may be required to complete this installation.  
ꢀꢁ  
ꢄꢁ  
1. Connect the cable from the outside cable or satel-  
lite service to CABLE IN or SATELLITE IN on  
the cable box or satellite receiver. See your device’s  
owner’s guide for instructions and cable compatibility.  
ꢄꢁ  
ꢃꢁ  
*ODPNJOHꢅ  
"OUFOOBꢅPSꢅ  
$BCMF  
2. Connect RCA-type cables from the Y Pb Pr outputs  
on the HDTV cable box or satellite receiver to COM-  
PONENT on the TV back panel, matching the  
colored connections.  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
ꢂꢁ  
3. Connect left (white) and right (red) audio cables from  
the HDTV cable box or satellite receiver to COMPO-  
NENT /AUDIO LEFT and AUDIO RIGHT on the  
TV back panel.  
4. Optional: To allow use of the Split Screen feature with  
channels from ANT 1 and the cable box or satellite  
receiver, connect the incoming terrestrial antenna or  
cable service (not satellite) to ANT 1/MAIN on the  
TV back panel. A coaxial splitter, available at most  
electronics supply stores, may be required to com-  
plete this installation.  
Figure 1. Connecting an external HDTV receiver with  
component video connections  
Note:  
To receive the benefits of digital surround sound, con-  
nect the digital audio output from your cable box or  
satellite receiver directly to your digital A/V receiver.  
22  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
Standard Cable Box, Satellite  
Receiver, or Other Device with  
S-Video  
Required: S-Video cable and left/right analog stereo  
audio cables.  
Wall Outlet Cable (no cable box)  
(can be used with a CableCARD™)  
It is very important to connect the incoming cable for your  
primary viewing source to ANT 1/MAIN, especially for  
CableCARD™ use.  
1. Connect the primary incoming coaxial lead cable to  
ANT 1/MAIN on the TV back panel.  
1. Connect the cable from the outside cable or satellite  
service to CABLE IN or SATELLITE IN on the  
cable box or satellite receiver.  
2. For an optional secondary antenna source, connect  
an antenna (or cable) to ANT 2/AUX  
.
3. If you have subscribed to a CableCARD™ service,  
Insert the CableCARD into the CableCARD slot. The  
top of the card must face in the direction indicated by  
the CARD TOP arrow.  
2. Connect an S-Video cable from VIDEO OUT on the  
cable box or satellite receiver back panel to INPUT  
S-VIDEO on the TV back panel.  
3. Connect left (white) and right (red) audio cables from  
AUDIO OUT on the cable box or satellite receiver to  
INPUT/AUDIO LEFT and AUDIO RIGHT on the  
TV back panel.  
See chapter 1, “Television Overview,” for additional  
CableCARD information. Detailed TV Guide On Screen  
information is in the separate User’s Manual.  
Note: Refer to the cable box or satellite receiver Owner’s  
Guide for cable or dish antenna connections to the  
receiver.  
$"#-&ꢃ*/ꢃPSꢃ  
4"5&--*5&ꢃ*/  
"OZꢃ4ꢅ7JEFPꢃ%FWJDF  
ꢋ  
"6%*0ꢀ065  
-  
ꢋ  
ꢀꢁ  
7*%&0ꢀ065  
%  
"
.
ꢄꢁ  
*ODPNJOHꢃ  
"
3
ꢂꢁ  
$BCMFꢃGSPNꢃ  
64&ꢄ8*5)  
"/5ꢄꢂꢄꢅꢄ"69  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
$BCMF$"3%™  
8BMM  
ꢂꢁ  
57ꢃ#BDLꢃ1BOFM  
$BCMF$"3%™64&ꢄ8*5)ꢄ"/5ꢄꢁꢄꢄꢄꢄ$"3%ꢄ501  
ꢀꢁ  
Figure 3. Wall Outlet Cable  
Figure 2. Connecting a device with S-Video  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
23  
Antenna with a Single Lead  
Antennas with Separate UHF and  
VHF Leads  
A. For an antenna with flat twin leads  
A 300-ohm-to-75-ohm transformer is required. This is not  
included with the TV, but is available at most electronics  
stores.  
Required: UHF/VHF combiner  
This is not included with the TV, but is available at most  
electronics stores.  
A1. For an antenna with flat twin leads, connect the  
300-ohm twin leads to the 300-ohm-to-75-ohm trans-  
former.  
1. Connect the UHF and VHF antenna leads to the UHF/  
VHF combiner.  
2. Push the combiner onto ANT 1/MAIN on the TV  
A2. Push the 75-ohm side of the transformer onto ANT 1  
back panel.  
on the TV back panel.  
B. For cable or antenna with coaxial lead  
64  
Connect the coaxial lead directly to ANT 1 on the TV  
back panel.  
6
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
$  
$
6)'ꢀ"OUFOOBꢀꢀ  
7)'ꢀ"OUFOOBꢀ  
$IBOOFMTꢀꢇꢃꢁꢈꢆ  
$IBOOFMTꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆ  
57ꢃ#BDLꢃ  
1BOFM  
64&ꢄ8*5)  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
$BCMF$"3%™  
'MBUꢀ5XJOꢀ-FBEꢀ  
&YUFSOBM  
"OUFOOB  
PSꢀ$BCMF  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂ0INꢃ  
'MBU5XJOꢃ  
-FBE  
ꢄꢅꢂ0IN  
$PBYJBMꢃ  
$BCMF  
ꢈꢉꢉꢃ0INꢃUPꢃ  
ꢊꢋꢃ0INꢀ  
$PNCJOFS  
6)'  
57ꢀCBDLꢀQBOFM  
5Pꢀ"/5ꢀꢁꢍ."*/  
ꢇꢌ  
#ꢆ  
7)'  
4JEF  
7JFX  
#BDL  
7JFX  
"ꢇꢆ  
ꢁꢌ  
Figure 5. Connecting separate UHF and VHF Antennas  
"ꢈꢆ  
0QUJPOBMꢃꢀꢁꢁꢂ0INꢂ  
UPꢂꢄꢅꢂ0IN  
.BUDIJOHꢃ5SBOTGPSNFS  
Figure 4. Connecting a Single Antenna  
Mitsubishi strongly recommends you avoid using  
antennas with flat twin leads. Flat twin lead  
antenna wires are subject to interference which  
may adversely affect the performance of the TV.  
We recommend using coaxial antenna cable.  
24  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
5. Connect either an S-Video or composite video  
cable from VIDEO OUT on the VCR back panel to  
INPUT/VIDEO or S-VIDEO on the TV back panel.  
Connect only one type of video cable; S-Video is  
recommended, if available.  
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet  
Cable  
Required: Two-way RF splitter, 3 coaxial cables, right and  
left analog audio cables, either S-video or video cable.  
These are not included with the TV but are available at  
most electronics stores.  
Optional  
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording feature and  
to record high-definition digital channels converted to  
analog standard-definition video and analog stereo  
audio, perform these two additional steps.  
1. Connect the incoming cable or antenna to IN on the  
RF splitter.  
2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF split-  
6. Connect left (white) and right (red) audio cables from  
ter to ANTENNA IN on the VCR back panel.  
AUDIO IN on the VCR to MONITOR OUT LEFT  
/
3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF  
splitter to ANT 1/MAIN on the TV back panel. This  
connection also allows you to use the TV Guide On  
Screen® and Split Screen features.  
RIGHT on the TV back panel. If your VCR is mono  
(non-stereo), connect only the white (left) cable.  
7. Connect a composite video cable from VIDEO  
IN on the VCR back panel to MONITOR OUT/  
VIDEO on the TV back panel.  
4. To use the TV speakers with the VCR, connect left  
(white) and right (red) audio cables from AUDIO  
OUT on the VCR to INPUT/AUDIO LEFT and  
AUDIO RIGHT on the TV back panel. If your VCR is  
mono (non-stereo), connect only the white (left) cable.  
"/5&//"  
"6%*0  
*/  
065  
*/  
7*%&0  
065 */  
4ꢀ7*%&0  
3
-
065
ꢄꢂ  
ꢁꢂ  
ꢄꢂ  
ꢄꢂ  
ꢁꢂ  
R
Figure 6. Connecting a VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
25  
6. To use the TV speakers with the VCR, connect left  
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video)  
Required: Two-way RF splitter, 4 coaxial cables, right and  
left audio cables, S-Video or composite video cable, plus  
component or S-Video cables and audio cables required  
to connect the TV to the cable box.  
(white) and right (red) audio cables from AUDIO OUT  
on the VCR back panel to INPUT/AUDIO LEFT  
and AUDIO RIGHT on the TV back panel. If your  
VCR is mono (non-stereo), connect only the white (left)  
cable.  
7. Connect either an S-Video or composite video  
cable from VIDEO OUT on the VCR back panel to  
INPUT/VIDEO or INPUT/S-VIDEO on the TV  
back panel. Connect only one type of video cable.  
S-Video is recommended, if available.  
1. Connect the incoming cable to IN on the RF splitter.  
2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF split-  
ter to CABLE IN on the cable box.  
3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF  
splitter to ANT 1/MAIN on the TV back panel. This  
connection also allows you to use the TV Guide On  
Screen® and Split Screen features.  
Optional  
8. To use the TV Guide On Screen recording feature to  
record to the VCR from ANT 1 or INPUT 1 or  
2:  
4. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the cable  
a. Connect left (white) and right (red) audio cables  
from AUDIO IN on the VCR back panel to  
MONITOR OUT/LEFT and RIGHT on the TV  
back panel.  
box to ANTENNA IN on the VCR back panel.  
5. Connect the cable box outputs to the TV as shown  
in one of the options listed below. This connection  
allows the TV to receive the best available signal  
directly from the cable box.  
b. Connect a video cable from VIDEO IN on the  
VCR back panel to MONITOR OUT/VIDEO on  
the TV back panel.  
Figure 1: Component video output to the TV’s  
COMPONENT Y Pb Pr jacks; analog stereo  
audio to the associated AUDIO jacks.  
Note: When using this connection configuration with the  
connections used in step 5, it is possible to view  
live cable programs through the VCR Device. For  
best picture quality always view live cable pro-  
grams directly from the cable box device.  
OR  
Figure 2: S-Video output to the TV’s  
INPUT/S-VIDEO jack; analog stereo audio to  
the associated AUDIO jacks.  
"6%*0  
"/5&//"  
*/  
ꢁꢂ  
*/  
065  
-
4ꢀ7*%&0 7*%&0  
-
065
065 */  
3
3
065  
ꢁꢂ  
$"#-&  
065  
*/  
:
1C  
1S  
4ꢀ7*%&0  
"6%*0  
-
3
64&ꢄ8*5)  
$BCMF$"3%™  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
Figure 7. Connecting a VCR to a cable box  
26  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
HDMI Device (Cable Box, Satellite  
DVI Video Device (Cable Box,  
Receiver, DVD Player, or Other Device) Satellite Receiver, DVD Player, or  
Required: HDMI-to-HDMI cable. This is not included  
with the TV.  
Other Device)  
Analog stereo audio cables and a DVI-to-HDMI cable or  
Connect an HDMI cable from the TV back panel to the  
HDMI device output. HDMI devices provide video and  
audio through this cable, so no other connection is  
required. There are two HDMI inputs on the TV back  
panel.  
DVI/HDMI adapter and HDMI cable are required. These  
are not included with the TV. They may be available at  
your local electronics retailer.  
1. Connect the DVI-to-HDMI cable (recommended) or  
HDMI cable with DVI/HDMI adapter from the DVI  
device’s back panel to the TV back panel.  
NOTE: If you are using a DVI/HDMI adapter, it is impor-  
tant to connect the adapter to the DVI device for  
best performance.  
2. Connect a set of audio cables from AUDIO OUT  
on the DVI device back panel to the HDMI/DVI  
AUDIO on the TV back panel. Connect the red  
cable to the RIGHT jack and the white cable to the  
LEFT jack.  
57ꢀ#BDLꢀ1BOFM  
)%.*ꢀ%FWJDF  
NOTE: The HDMI connection supports copy protection  
(HDCP).  
Some devices require connecting to an analog  
input first, in order to view on-screen menus and  
to select DVI as the ouput. Please review your  
equipment instructions for DVI connectivity and  
compatibility.  
Figure 8. Connecting an HDMI device.  
Note: HDMI inputs are  
interoperability with other products certified by  
Simplay™.  
certified for proper  
)%.*ꢀꢅꢀ%7*ꢀ"6%*0  
"6%*0  
-&'5  
.0/0ꢈ  
ꢁꢂ  
"6%*0  
3*()5  
IMPORTANT  
For sound from your devices, note that the  
HDMI inputs can receive digital stereo audio  
signals only. To use digital surround sound for  
an HDMI or DVI device, connect that device’s  
digital audio output directly to your A/V  
receiver. See the Owner’s Guides for those  
devices for instructions.  
)%.*  
ꢃꢂ  
57ꢀ#BDLꢀ1BOFM  
ꢃꢂ  
%7*ꢄUPꢄ)%.*ꢀ$BCMF  
%7*ꢀ%FWJDF  
ꢁꢂ  
"6%*0ꢀ065  
-
IMPORTANT  
3
%7*ꢀ065  
To connect a personal computer to the TV,  
see chapter 7, “Using the TV with a Personal  
Computer.”  
Figure 9. Connecting a DVI device  
The HDMI input processes signals as standard  
motion video and is not designed to process  
computer resolutions.  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
27  
DVD Player with Component Video A/V Receiver (Sound System)  
Component video cables and analog audio cables are  
required. These are not included with the TV.  
Most setups require either a digital audio cable or analog  
stereo audio cables.  
1. Connect the component video cables from Y PB  
PR VIDEO OUT on the back of the DVD player to  
the COMPONENT jacks on the TV back panel,  
matching the red, green, and blue colored connec-  
tions.  
The TV makes all audio available in digital and analog  
formats. Analog audio coming into the TV is available  
in digital format on the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack.  
Digital incoming audio is available in analog format on the  
AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT jacks. Usually, only one of  
the following connections is required:  
2. Connect left (white) and right (red) stereo audio  
cables from AUDIO OUT on the back of the DVD  
player to COMPONENT/AUDIO LEFT and  
RIGHT on the TV back panel.  
To connect an analog A/V receiver  
Connect left (white) and right (red) audio cables from  
AUDIO OUT/LEFT and RIGHT on the TV back  
panel to the TV AUDIO INPUT on the A/V receiver.  
$0.10/&/5  
To connect a digital A/V receiver with Dolby  
Digital surround sound and PCM audio support  
Connect one end of the digital audio cable to  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT on the back of the TV.  
Connect the other end to the COAXIAL DIGITAL  
INPUT on the back of the A/V receiver.  
"6%*0  
-&'5  
.0/0ꢈ  
"6%*0  
3*()5  
-
3
"6%*0ꢀ065  
:
1C  
1S  
*
-&'5  
"6%*0  
065  
3*()5  
Figure 10. Connecting a DVD player with component  
video  
%*(*5"-  
"6%*0  
065  
Figure 11. Connecting audio from the TV to an A/V  
receiver  
Note:  
On rare occasions, an HDMI signal may be  
copy-restricted and cannot be output from the TV  
as a digital signal. To hear these copy-protected  
signals through the A/V receiver, use connections  
for analog A/V receivers.  
IMPORTANT  
See Appendix B for component video signal  
compatibility information.  
For digital audio connections to your A/V  
receiver, see your DVD player and A/V  
receiver Owner’s Guides.  
Check the A/V receiver’s Owner’s Guide for  
information concerning use of the digital input  
and switching between digital sound and analog  
stereo sound from the TV.  
28  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
Older Cable Box  
Camcorder  
Required: 3 coaxial cables, one two-way RF splitter.  
These are not included with the TV.  
Required: Analog stereo audio cables and either an  
S-Video or composite video cable.  
When this setup is complete, you can use the TV remote  
control, when programmed, to change channels on the  
cable box.  
NOTE: For IEEE 1394 camcorders, see also later in this  
chapter under “IEEE 1394 Devices.”  
1. Connect either an S-Video or composite video cable  
from VIDEO OUT on the camcorder to INPUT 3/  
VIDEO or S-VIDEO on the TV. Connect only one  
type of video cable; S-Video is recommended, if avail-  
able.  
Note: This connection is not recommended. The other  
connections described in this chapter provide  
better quality audio and video to the TV and allow  
NetCommand and TV Guide On Screen to work  
with the cable box.  
2. Connect left (white) and right (red) audio cables  
from AUDIO OUT on the camcorder to INPUT 3/  
AUDIO L and AUDIO R on the TV.  
1. Connect the incoming cable to IN on the RF splitter.  
2. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF split-  
ter to ANT 1/MAIN on the TV back panel.  
3. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the RF split-  
ter to IN on the standard cable box.  
4. Connect one coaxial cable from OUT on the cable  
box to ANT 2/AUX on the TV back panel.  
-&'5  
64&ꢄ8*5)  
$BCMF$"3%™  
"/5ꢄꢂꢄꢅꢄ"69  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
5Pꢀ"/5ꢀꢃꢂ"69  
ꢆꢅ  
5
ꢃꢅ  
P
"
/
5ꢀꢁꢂ."*/  
57ꢀCBDLꢀQBOFM  
ꢁꢅ  
ꢄꢃ  
ꢂꢃ  
ꢃꢅ  
ꢆꢅ  
ꢄꢅ  
ꢄꢅ  
3'ꢀ4QMJUUFS  
*ODPNJOHꢀ  
$BCMF  
ꢄꢃ  
*/  
$BCMFꢀCPYꢀ  
CBDLꢀQBOFM  
065  
Figure 12. Connecting an older cable box  
$PNQPTJUFꢀ7JEFPꢀ$BCMF  
4ꢁ7JEFPꢀ$BCMF  
ꢂꢃ  
Figure 13. Analog connections for a camcorder  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
29  
IEEE 1394 Devices  
Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices  
Compatible A/V devices include some, but not all, cable  
boxes, D-VHS VCRs, A/V discs, and future products.  
Some devices may have IEEE 1394 connectors but are not  
compatible with the TV. Areas of compatibility to consider  
are:  
4-pin connector 6-pin connector 6-pin-to-4-pin adapter  
If you wish to connect a 6-pin device to the TV (such as a  
camcorder), and the device is designed to receive electri-  
cal power from another 6-pin device, there are several  
ways to provide electrical power to the device:  
1. Digital Video Signals  
The TV can decode MPEG2 and DV, and HDV video as  
provided by cable boxes and some camcorders. If the  
TV is unable to decode the digital signal supplied by the  
camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV using analog  
audio plus composite video, S-video, or component video,  
or use HDMI audio/video. Other types of digital video,  
such as PC video provided by some computers, must  
be decoded by the source device and sent to the TV as  
analog video, S-video, or DVI/HDMI video.  
Connect the camcorder directly to the household AC.  
Use the camcorder’s battery for power.  
Connect the camcorder directly to another 6-pin  
device in the network that can provide power.  
Connection Methods  
2. Digital Audio Signals  
There are two connection methods for IEEE 1394 devices. Use  
the method that fits your network of audio/video products.  
When received with video signals, the TV can decode  
Dolby Digital signals and MPEG audio signals. Other  
types of digital audio as provided by some digital record-  
ing devices, such as MP3 audio and DTS audio, cannot be  
decoded by the TV when received over IEEE 1394 con-  
nections.  
Direct Device-To-Device Method  
The IEEE 1394 interface allows you to chain devices,  
unlike audio and video connections that require you to  
connect each individual device directly to the TV. For  
example, you can connect your D-VHS to your 1394 A/V  
disc and then connect the 1394 A/V disc to the TV. The  
resulting IEEE 1394 chain allows you to add more devices  
to the chain. You will see an icon for each device in the  
TV’s Input Selection menu and can also send information  
from any IEEE 1394 device to other compatible devices.  
The TV may not be able to pass incompatible digital audio  
signals on the coaxial digital audio output. These signals  
may pass to other devices, however, on IEEE 1394 cables.  
3. Digital Control Signal  
The TV can serve as the control center for IEEE 1394  
audio/video devices, such as VCRs, A/V Discs, tuners,  
cable boxes, and amplifiers that are compatible with the  
following IEEE 1394 control standards.  
%JHJUBM  
7$3ꢁ  
EIA-775. Designed for tuning devices such as cable  
boxes, allowing the device to send simple graph-  
ics. This standard does not, however, allow the TV to  
control the cable box by IEEE 1394.  
"ꢀ7ꢁ%JTDꢁ  
57  
AV/C (Audio Video Control). Designed to provide  
basic controls such as play, stop, channel selection,  
and volume, as appropriate for the device.  
Hub Connection Method  
The IEEE 1394 standard allows you to use the TV as a hub  
within the audio/video network. Each device can send  
information, which may include audio and video, to any  
other device in the network.  
Four-Pin and 6-Pin Connections  
There are two different types of connectors used for IEEE  
1394 terminals and cables: a 4-pin and a 6-pin type. Both  
types send the same digital audio, video, and control  
signals, but the 6-pin connectors can also supply low-  
voltage electrical power to connected devices. This TV  
uses only 4-pin type connectors.  
%JHJUBM  
7$3ꢄꢅꢀ  
"ꢇ7ꢄ  
%JTDꢄꢅꢀ  
%JHJUBMꢄ  
7$3ꢄꢅꢆ  
A 6-pin connector cannot be connected directly to a 4-pin  
jack, and vice versa. To connect a 6-pin device to a 4-pin  
device, use a 6-pin-to-4-pin adapter or adapter cable.  
These cables are available from electronics and computer  
stores.  
57  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄ  
.POJUPS  
30  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
IEEE 1394 Devices, continued  
Tips for Connecting IEEE 1394 Devices  
57ꢀ*OQVUꢀꢁ  
Do not loop the last  
device in the chain back  
to the TV. When the  
device chain is looped,  
the TV may not be able  
to work with the other  
devices.  
%JHJUBMꢀ  
%7%ꢀ  
%JHJUBM  
7$3ꢀ  
57  
Place devices that have only a mechanical (two-  
position) power switch at the end of the chain or leave  
the power switch in the on position. When turned off,  
IEEE 1394 signals may not be able to pass through the  
device to other devices.  
You can connect an IEEE 1394 camcorder with an IEEE  
1394 cable or with analog audio/video cables. In either  
case, test using the TV’s remote control to operate the  
camcorder via the IEEE 1394 cable.  
Place devices with the slowest communication speed  
at the end of the chain. Sometimes the communica-  
tion speed is marked near the IEEE 1394 connector  
with an “S” number. The higher the number, the faster  
the communication speed. This TV has a communica-  
tion speed of s400. Devices with slow communica-  
tion speeds can interfere with IEEE 1394 signals from  
faster devices. When setting up a digital recording  
between a faster device and a slower device, make the  
slower device the source and make the faster device  
the recorder.  
1. Connect your IEEE 1394 camcorder to one of the TV’s  
IEEE 1394 jacks.  
Use IEEE 1394 cables 15 feet or less in length  
between devices.  
This TV is an IEEE 1394a device. It can be used with  
an IEEE 1394b system when an IEEE-1394a-to-1394b  
convertor is used. IEEE 1394b systems are capable of  
greater distances and multi-room applications.  
The TV can recognize a maximum of seven IEEE 1394  
devices at any one time.  
2. When the New 1394 Device screen displays (see  
above), confirm that the correct format, either MPEG  
or DV, is marked. In most cases, the TV automatically  
detects the camcorder format in use.  
IEEE 1394 Camcorders  
Control Functions. Connect the camcorder to an  
IEEE 1394 jack on the front or rear of the TV and test  
using the TV’s remote control to operate the cam-  
corder. If your model does not operate properly, use  
the camcorder’s control buttons instead.  
3
If you have connected a DV camcorder and the MPEG  
radio button is marked, press to select DV  
.
4. Press EXIT  
.
MPEG and DV Camcorders. If you are unable to  
play back over the IEEE 1394 interface, use the analog  
audio/video connections described in chapter 2, “TV  
Connections.”  
DV Camcorder Notes  
A. When viewing DV camcorders, it is normal for  
temporary audio and video distortion to occur  
under conditions such as:  
B. Some older DV Camcorder models are not  
compatible with this TV’s IEEE 1394 system  
and the New 1394 Device screen will not  
Playback start and stop  
Playback pause  
Forward or reverse picture search  
appear when the camcorder is connected. For  
playback of incompatible DV camcorders, try  
S-video and analog audio connections instead.  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
31  
5. Place any unused ends behind the devices to prevent  
stray signals from reaching the IR sensors.  
IR Emitter NetCommand® and TV  
Guide On Screen  
64ꢄ8*5)  
"/5ꢄꢁꢅꢄ."*/  
"/5ꢄꢂꢄꢅꢄ"69  
An IR emitter cable is included with the TV.  
ꢄꢃ  
0UIFSꢀ"ꢁ7ꢀEFWJDF  
The NetCommand system uses emitters connected to  
the IR EMITTER jack to control other devices such  
as VCRs, DVD players, cable boxes, and satellite receiv-  
ers. This control system is shared with the TV Guide On  
Screen system.  
ꢂꢃ  
ꢅꢃ  
1. Connect the plug end of the supplied IR emitter cable  
to the IR EMITTER NetCommand® jack on the  
TV back panel.  
57ꢀ#BDLꢀ1BOFM  
4
$)  
%
4
*
(
*
5
"
-
6
3
3
0
6
/
%
"ꢁ7ꢀ3FDFJWFS  
2. Run the cable for each of the emitter ends under,  
alongside, or over each device to be controlled so that  
the emitter end is in front of the area where the remote  
control sensor is located.  
ꢄꢃ  
Figure 14. Connecting IR Emitter NetCommand  
3. Position the emitter end with the emitter bulb facing  
the remote control sensor. The bulb emits infrared  
light in a cone-shaped pattern. Place the bulb far  
enough from the sensor to allow the cone pattern to  
reach the sensor.  
*OꢀGSPOUꢀPGꢀBꢀ  
TJOHMFꢀBWFSBHFꢁ  
TJ[FEꢀEFWJDF  
*3ꢀTFOTPSꢀ  
The IR sensor is usually behind the plastic window  
of the front display panel. It is sometimes visible  
with the aid of a flashlight and is normally a round or  
square cutout behind the plastic. If you cannot see  
the sensor and the device’s Owner’s Guide does not  
specify the location, you can find it by following these  
steps using the device’s remote control:  
*3ꢀTFOTPSꢀ  
0OꢀUPQꢀPGꢀBꢀTJOHMFꢀ  
UBMMꢀEFWJDF  
a. Hold the remote about one-half inch from the  
front of the device. Starting from one end of the  
display window plastic, press the POWER button.  
b. If the device does not respond, move the remote  
control one inch toward the center and try again.  
*3ꢀTFOTPSꢀ  
c. Repeat this until the device responds.  
d. Note this location and then start over from the  
other end of the display window plastic, repeating  
until the device responds again.  
*OꢀGSPOUꢂꢀTIBSFEꢀ  
CZꢀUXPꢀBWFSBHFꢁ  
TJ[FEꢀEFWJDFT  
*3ꢀTFOTPSꢀ  
The remote control sensor is somewhere between  
these two positions. This is usually enough accu-  
racy for placement of the IR emitters.  
Figure 15. IR emitters so the signal can be “seen” by the  
IR sensor on each device.  
With some devices, the emitter works better  
facing downward from the top of the device.  
Experiment if needed.  
4. Secure the emitter ends in place using double-sided  
tape.  
IMPORTANT  
Position IR emitters so that each device’s  
sensor “sees” the signal from only one  
emitter. Otherwise, a device receiving signals  
from multiple sources (remote controls, IR  
emitters) may not respond at all.  
32  
Chapter 2. TV Connections  
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections  
Q. My VCR (or other device) does not have two sets of stereo audio outputs. How can I connect this device’s  
audio to both the TV and the A/V Receiver?  
A. You need to connect the device to the TV and then make changes to the A/V receiver setup.  
1. Connect the VCR’s audio and video to the TV; connect the single set of stereo audio outputs to the TV only.  
2. Perform the procedure for setting up a device connection. See chapter 3, “TV Setup,” and the section entitled  
“When You First Connect a Device.” NetCommand IR Learning is optional.  
2. Press INPUT to display the Input Selection menu, highlight the VCR’s icon, and press ENTER to select the VCR.  
3. Press MENU to open the Main menu, highlight the NetCommand icon, and press ENTER  
.
4. Under AV RECEIVER SETUP, confirm that the text box displays None.  
5. Press EXIT  
.
After performing these steps, the TV will automatically pass the audio signal to the A/V receiver.  
Q. I have both the TV stereo audio output and TV digital audio output connected to the same input designa-  
tions on my A/V Receiver. How do I switch between analog audio and digital audio?  
A. In most setups, analog audio is also output as digital audio, so no switching is required, and there is no need to  
connect the analog output. In some circumstances, however, you may also need analog audio from the TV. For  
example, MP3 audio is only output in analog format, so you must connect the TV’s analog AUDIO OUTPUT to the  
A/V Receiver if you want to hear MP3 audio through the A/V receiver. Refer to your A/V Receiver user’s guide to  
find out how analog/digital audio switching works.  
Q. The front panel of my A/V Receiver is too tall or too convex for the IR emitter signal to reach the remote  
control sensor of the A/V Receiver. What can I do?  
A. There are several possible solutions.  
Mount the IR Emitter on the top, front edge of the A/V Receiver over the remote control sensor. Use tape to  
secure it in place.  
Mount the IR Emitter on the underside of the shelf above the A/V Receiver (if the A/V Receiver is in a cabinet).  
Use double sided tape to secure it in place.  
Some small stick-on emitters from other manufacturers may be compatible with this TV’s IR Emitter jacks.  
These may be used instead of the supplied IR Emitters.  
Q. I occasionally need to see the menu from my A/V Receiver. How can I connect it to the TV for this purpose?  
A. Connect the A/V Receiver’s video output to an unused input on the TV and then use the A/V receiver’s remote  
control to display the menu.  
1. Connect the video output of the A/V Receiver to an unused input on the TV; Input 3 on the front panel is the  
most convenient. The Auto Input Sensing screen will displays when the TV detects the new connection,  
2. Press EXIT to close the screen without naming the input.  
3. Select INPUT 3 (or other input you used) from the Input Selection menu: press INPUT, highlight the Input 3 icon,  
and press ENTER  
.
4. Press the MENU key on the A/V receiver’s remote control to open the A/V receiver’s menu.  
5. When finished, disconnect the A/V receiver’s video input from the TV.  
Q. I have a high definition receiver I would like to connect and it also has an S-video output I would like to be  
able use as well. Is there any way to connect this receiver both ways?  
A. Yes, this item will appear twice in the Input Selection Menu. Just add this unit once using the COMPONENT  
or HDMI input and once using one of the S-VIDEO inputs. Mitsubishi suggests that you connect stereo audio  
outputs with the S-video input only.  
3
TV Setup  
Guidelines for Setting Up and Using Your New Widescreen TV . . . 34  
When You First Power On the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Using the TV’s Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
When You First Connect a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Initial NetCommand® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Additional Setup Using the NetCommand Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
34  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
Guidelines for Setting Up and Using Your New Widescreen TV  
Operations.” To use the TV Guide On Screen system  
to control recording, see the separate TV Guide On  
Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual.  
Getting Started  
1. Read the section entitled “Important Information  
About Your TV” starting on page 6.  
3. To understand use of the Input Selection menu with  
NetCommand-controlled devices, see chapter 6,  
“NetCommand Operations.”  
2. Choose a location for your TV.  
Allow at least four inches of space on all sides of  
the TV to help prevent overheating. Overheating  
may cause premature failure of the TV as well as  
shortened lamp life.  
4. If you have IEEE 1394 A/V devices, see chapter 6,  
“NetCommand Operations,” for details on operating  
such devices.  
Avoid locations where light may reflect off the screen.  
See the stand requirements under “Important  
Information About Your TV.”  
Additional TV Setup  
1. Review chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings,” to custom-  
ize TV operation. Press the MENU key to enter the menu  
system. Some examples of settings you may wish to  
change include:  
3. Install the batteries in the remote control. See  
chapter 4, “TV Operation and Features,” for infor-  
mation on use of the remote control.  
4. Plug your TV into a power outlet. The POWER indicator  
on the front of the TV will start blinking rapidly. After  
the POWER indicator stops blinking, press the POWER key  
to power on the TV.  
Input Name. Change the device names that appear  
in the Input Selection menu. See “Input Name  
Menu.”  
Icon Order. Rearrange the device icons in the  
Input Selection menu to put frequently used icons  
near the front. See “Icon Order Menu.”  
5. When the Welcome screen appears the first time you  
power on the TV, select a language for TV menus. You  
can later change the language through the Setup menu.  
FAV. Create lists of your favorite channels so you  
can find them quickly. See “Channel Menu.”  
6. Some TVs are shipped from the factory with demo  
mode active for use in retail stores. If demo mode is  
active when you first turn on the TV:  
Parental Lock. You can restrict TV viewing by  
program rating or by time of day. You can also  
disable the front-panel buttons—useful if you have  
small children. See “Parental Lock Menu.”  
a. Press MENU  
.
b. When the Main menu appears with Setup high-  
lighted, press ENTER.  
c. When the Setup menu opens, press to highlight  
Video Settings. Change the video adjustments  
to get the best picture for your viewing conditions.  
See “Audio/Video Menu.”  
the on-screen Demo Mode Off button.  
d. Press ENTER  
.
You may wish to change the Picture Mode from the  
default Brilliant to either Bright or Natural, which  
are suitable for most home viewing environments.  
7. Connect your A/V devices to the TV (see chapter  
2, “TV Connections”) and perform initial setup as  
described in chapter 3, “TV Setup.” Chapter 3 also  
provides instructions for setting up NetCommand  
control of your home theater and for enabling the TV  
Guide On Screen® system.  
2. To program the remote control to operate A/V devices  
not under NetCommand control, see Appendix D,  
“Programming the Remote Control.”  
8. You can now start watching TV or you can perform addi-  
TV Care  
tional setup and customization through the TV menus.  
Lamp Cartridge. When the lamp cartridge needs  
replacement, replace the lamp yourself and  
save the cost of a service call. See Appendix  
C for instructions.  
TV Operation  
1. Review chapter 4, “TV Operation and Features,” for  
TV features including:  
General Cleaning. To keep your TV looking its  
best, see the cleaning recommendations under  
Important Information About Your TV.”  
Input Selection (viewing source). Select a con-  
nected program source to watch, such as a VCR,  
DVD player, or antenna. Press INPUT on the remote  
control to select from icons for the TV inputs. See  
“Input Selection Menu.”  
Assistance  
Picture Formats. Press FORMAT to cycle through  
picture sizes and shapes to find the one best  
suited to the program you’re watching. See “TV  
Signals and Display Formats.”  
For troubleshooting, service, and product support,  
see Appendix E.  
For warranty information, see the TV warranty in  
the back of this book.  
2. To use the TV to control recordings through  
NetCommand, see chapter 6, “NetCommand  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
35  
Installing the Remote Control  
Batteries  
1. Remove the remote control’s back cover by gently  
pressing in the tab and lifting off the cover.  
2. Load the batteries, making sure the polarities (+) and  
(-) are correct. For best results, insert the negative (-)  
end first.  
2
3. Snap the cover back in place.  
1
The small remote  
requires two AAA  
alkaline batteries.  
Care of the Remote Controls  
Use only alkaline batteries.  
Be within 20 feet of the equipment.  
Do not press two or more buttons at the same time  
unless instructed to do so.  
2
Do not allow unit to get wet or become heated.  
Avoid dropping on hard surfaces.  
The large remote control requires two AA alkaline  
batteries.  
Do not use harsh chemicals to clean. Use only a soft,  
lightly moistened cloth.  
Do not mix old and new batteries.  
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.  
TV Tips  
Changing Channels  
To change channels:  
Turning the TV On or Off  
Enter the channel number using the number keys  
To turn the TV on or off, point the remote control at the  
front of the TV and press the POWER button. Alternatively,  
press the POWER button on the front panel of the TV.  
on the remote control and press ENTER. For a two-  
part digital channel, such as 3-1, press  
enter a dash (separator).  
3
1
to  
CANCEL  
Press CH  
a time.  
/
to change channels one channel at  
If You Turn Off the TV by Mistake  
1. Press POWER again within about 30 seconds, while  
the lamp is still hot, to have the TV come back on  
immediately.  
Press and hold CH  
channels.  
/
to move quickly through  
Press QV (QuickView) to switch back to the previ-  
ously tuned channel.  
2. If the LAMP indicator starts blinking (about 30  
seconds after you shut off power), wait about one  
minute for the LAMP indicator to stop blinking and  
press POWER to turn the TV on again.  
Use the FAV (Favorites) feature to set up lists of  
favorite channels and tune to them with the FAV key.  
See “Channel Menu” in chapter 5.  
Controlling Sound Volume  
NOTE: Memorize channels to make finding channels  
Press VOL  
/
to adjust the sound level.  
easier.  
36  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
Using the TV’s Setup Menu  
When You First Power On the TV  
Use the Setup menu for basic TV setup options. To  
display the Setup menu, press MENU to open the Main  
Choosing a Language for Menus  
When you power on the TV for the first time, you can  
select either English or Spanish for all menus. You can  
later change the language through the Setup menu.  
menu. With the Setup icon highlighted, press ENTER  
.
Figure 3. Open the Setup menu from the Main menu.  
Language (Setup Menu)  
Choose to display on-screen menus in either English or  
Spanish (Español).  
Figure 1. The Welcome screen lets you change the menu  
language when you first power on the TV.  
To listen to audio in other languages (when available), see  
chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings, and the “Audio Settings”  
section. Then refer to either “SAP” (analog signal) or  
“Language” (digital signal).  
TV Guide On Screen Setup Reminder  
If you do not set up the TV Guide On Screen system when  
you first turn on the TV, a reminder screen will appear the  
next six times you turn on the TV (see figure 2). To set up  
the TV Guide On Screen system, see “Additional Setup  
with the NetCommand Menu” later in this chapter.  
Memorize Channels (Setup Menu)  
For ANT 1/MAIN and ANT 2/AUX  
The memorization process performs two scans of all pos-  
sible channels on the selected ANT input. Analog chan-  
nels are scanned first, then the process is repeated for  
digital channels. Channel memorization may take up to 15  
minutes to complete.  
To start channel memorization  
1. Highlight an input selection based on your connections:  
Input  
Condition  
Ant 1 Air,  
Ant 2 Air  
When connected to an indoor/outdoor  
antenna  
Ant 1 Cable, When connected to direct cable (no cable  
Ant 2 Cable box)  
2. Press ENTER to start automatic channel memorization.  
To stop channel memorization before completion  
Figure 2. TV Guide On Screen setup reminder  
Press CANCEL  
.
Channels memorized before you pressed CANCEL are  
retained in memory. If you restart memorization, all previ-  
ously memorized channels for the selected antenna input  
are erased and the process restarts.  
After channel memorization, press CH  
/
to tune to  
memorized channels. Select the Channel menu for further  
channel editing, such as adding and deleting channels  
from memory, naming channels, and saving favorite chan-  
nels in custom memory banks.  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
37  
Note: If Clock Setting is set to Manual, each time the time  
change occurs, you must open this menu and set the  
TV’s clock ahead or back.  
Setup Menu, continued  
Note:  
If you have selected Auto for Clock Setting, the TV’s  
clock adjusts automatically to daylight savings time.  
If using a CableCARD™, the complete list of  
available channels is provided through the  
CableCARD and the ANT 1 option is grayed out.  
Setting the Clock Automatically  
Select the Time Zone and the Daylight Savings (DST)  
In the TV Guide On Screen® system, the chan-  
nels displayed and the order in which they are  
displayed are independent of the TV’s channel  
memorization. Refer to the TV Guide On Screen  
Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for  
detailed instructions on editing channels shown  
in this guide.  
options for your state. Press  
to select Applies or  
Ignore. You may then tune to a channel on ANT 1 or  
ANT 2 that uses Extended Data Service (XDS) time data,  
typically a PBS channel. With Auto selected, the TV auto-  
matically retrieves the correct time and date information  
from this channel.  
Be aware that if a channel displays incorrect time informa-  
tion, it is because of information sent from the broadcaster  
and is not a defect of the TV.  
Clock (Setup Menu)  
Set the clock if you wish to use the TV’s Timer function or  
schedule NetCommand-controlled recordings. You can  
use either the manual or auto method to set the clock.  
Note: You may find that some channels send the incor-  
rect time and the TV clock is reset every time you  
tune to those channels. To prevent unwanted  
clock resets, first use the Auto method to set the  
clock from a channel sending the correct time,  
then change the method to Manual.  
Timer (Setup Menu)  
Figure 4. Clock submenu  
Setting the Clock Manually  
Time  
With the hour highlighted in yellow characters, press  
repeatedly to slowly increment the hour and associated  
AM/PM indicator or press and hold to quickly increment  
the hour. Press ENTER to highlight the minutes in yellow.  
Figure 5. Timer submenu  
Press  
to set the minutes. Press to move to the  
Date box.  
The Timer feature allows you to set a day and time for the  
TV to turn on automatically and the device and channel to  
display when it switches on. If the TV is already on at the  
requested time, the TV automatically tunes to the channel  
you designated in the Timer menu.  
Date  
With the month highlighted in yellow characters, press  
to select the correct month. Press ENTER to highlight the  
day. Press  
to highlight the year. Press  
to select the correct day. Press ENTER  
to select the current year.  
When the Timer turns on the TV, the screen displays the  
message “Press a button for the TV to stay on.” Press  
any button on the remote control within five minutes if you  
wish the TV to remain on.  
Press to move to the Time Zone box.  
Time Zone  
Select your correct time zone. Press or to select  
the time zone for your area (Atlantic, Eastern, Central,  
Mountain, Pacific, Alaska or Hawaii). Press to move  
to the Daylight Savings box.  
Note: The TV clock must be set before you can use the  
Timer feature.  
On/Off  
Daylight Savings  
Press or to select either Applies or Ignore, depending  
on whether or not daylight savings time is used in your area.  
Press  
to enable or disable the Timer. Press to  
move to the Day box.  
38  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
Setup Menu, continued  
Note: CableCARD™ and TV Guide On Screen® re-  
quire the Fast Power On setting. If you insert a  
CableCARD™ or activate TV Guide On Screen, the  
TV will automatically override a Low Power setting  
and change to the Fast Power On setting.  
Set Day  
Select the day or days that the TV will turn on automati-  
cally. Press or to select Daily, Mon-Fri (Monday  
through Friday), or individual days of the week. Press to  
move to the Time box.  
Set Time  
Demo Mode Off (Setup Menu)  
With the hour highlighted in yellow characters, press  
repeatedly to slowly increment the hour and associated  
AM/PM indicator or press and hold to quickly increment  
the hour. Press ENTER to highlight the minutes. Press  
to set the minutes. Press to move to the Device box.  
If Demo Mode is active, highlight the Demo Mode Off  
button and press ENTER  
.
Software Version (Setup Menu)  
For servicing purposes, the TV’s software version is dis-  
played at the upper right side of the Setup menu.  
Device  
Press or to select the device to use when the Timer  
turns on the TV. If the TV is already on at the selected  
time, the Timer will switch the TV to this device. Press  
to move to the Channel box.  
When You First Connect a Device  
During the initial set-up process for a device, the TV will:  
Channel  
a. detect the connected device  
When the selected device is an antenna, you can select a  
channel for the TV to tune to when it comes on. Highlight  
the Channel box and  
b. prompt you to identify the device by name  
c. prompt you to perform NetCommand set-up for  
the device, if applicable  
d. repeat the above steps for any additional newly  
connected devices  
press CH  
/
or  
to choose from memorized  
channels.  
Enter a channel number from the remote control.  
You can also enter sub-channel numbers for  
digital channels by using the —/CANCEL key.  
ClearThought® Easy Connect Auto Input Sensing  
This TV’s ClearThought® auto input sensing feature  
detects most connections automatically. The first time  
you connect to a ClearThought input, you are prompted to  
select a name for the connected device. The table below  
defines connections the TV can detect.  
Note: The POWER/TIMER indicator flashes green when the TV  
is off to indicate the TV Timer has been set.  
Energy Mode (Setup Menu)  
The Energy Mode option lets you select the TV’s level of  
power consumption while the TV is turned off. Choose  
either Low Power or Fast Power On. The Low Power  
setting uses less energy, but TV power-on takes longer.  
The default is Fast Power On. Keep this setting at Fast  
Power On if you:  
Auto Detection Active  
INPUT video jacks  
COMPONENT video jacks  
No Auto Detection  
1,  
2
,
3
ANT 1/ANT 2  
MONITOR OUT  
(all jacks)  
HDMI  
PC-DVI  
IEEE 1394  
*
*
Expect to use the TV Timer function to turn on the  
TV at a preselected time.  
All AUDIO jacks  
Need the TV Clock to remain accurate for the TV  
Timer and for scheduling NetCommand-controlled  
recordings. With the Low Power setting, you  
must reset the TV Clock if the TV is left turned off  
for over 48 hours.  
*
If the device is powered off when connected, detec-  
tion occurs when the device is next powered on.  
1. Connect your devices to the TV, making note of which  
TV input you have used for each device.  
Wish to receive updates to the TV Guide On  
Screen program listings.  
Need faster power on.  
Wish to turn off the TV while making a NetCom-  
mand-controlled recording.  
Wish to schedule future NetCommand-controlled  
recordings for a time when the TV will be off.  
The TV and the devices can be either on or off when  
connecting. If the TV is powered off, the detection  
process will occur the next time you turn on the TV.  
2. For most devices, the Auto Input Sensing screen  
opens (see figure 6). With the text box highlighted,  
press  
to select a name for the device from the  
following list of names:  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
39  
You must have at hand the remote controls for  
the TV and the current device.  
When You First Connect a Device,  
continued  
More About Auto Input Sensing  
Cablebox  
Camcorder  
DVD  
DVD2  
DVR (digital video recorder, recordable DVD)  
Game  
HD Disc (high-definition disc)  
Satellite  
VCR  
Be careful to choose a different name for each input.  
You can change the input name at a later time using  
the Input Name menu.  
If you disconnect a device and then later connect a  
different device to the vacated jack, use the Input  
Name menu to update the device name. If you want  
the device under NetCommand control, you must  
perform NetCommand “learning” for the new device.  
Antenna inputs (ANT 1/ANT 2), audio connections,  
and TV outputs are never detected.  
The name you assign here will appear in the Input  
Selection menu and can be changed later through the  
Input Name menu.  
If you select one of the device names checked in  
the table above, the on-screen Learn button will  
change from grayed out to full color, indicating that  
NetCommand “learning” is available for the device.  
IEEE 1394 Connections  
The New 1394 Device screen appears if you connected  
an IEEE 1394 device. See figure 7. IEEE 1394 devices are  
automatically under NetCommand control. The TV can  
recognize up to seven IEEE 1394 devices at one time. If  
you connect more than one device of the same type, a  
unique identifier is added to the name for each one. For  
example, if you connect three A/V discs, you may see AV  
Disc, AV Disc1, AV Disc2.  
Name you  
select for  
the input  
NetCommand  
“Learn” button  
(initially grayed out)  
TV connec-  
tion used for  
this device  
Figure 6. The Auto Input Sensing screen appears when a  
device is first detected. Select a name for the connected  
device in this screen.  
3. Now you can either:  
Highlight Learn and press ENTER to perform  
Figure 7. The New 1394 Device screen shows the device  
name and includes a check box for an associated analog  
connection.  
NetCommand “learning” for the device, if appli-  
cable (recommended). NetCommand “learning”  
can be used to control the device types checked  
in the preceding list. See “Initial NetCommand  
Setup” later in this chapter. You can perform  
NetCommand setup at a later time, if preferred, by  
using the Learn option in the NetCommand menu.  
IEEE 1394 Device with an Analog Connection  
Some IEEE 1394 devices have both digital and analog  
outputs to the TV. If you have such a device, place a  
check mark in the Analog Connection check box to allow  
you to use the TV’s Input Selection menu to select either  
the analog or digital output.  
Press EXIT to close the screen. The TV will display  
the Auto Input Sensing screen for the next con-  
nection it finds.  
Note: To continue with NetCommand setup for the cur-  
For instructions on switching between analog and digital  
outputs, see chapter 6, “NetCommand Operations.”  
rent device:  
You must have connected and properly placed  
NetCommand IR emitters (see chapter 2, “TV  
Connections”).  
If your IEEE 1394 device can be connected to the TV with  
an analog connection, follow the instructions below.  
40  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
When You First Connect a Device  
,
Initial NetCommand® Setup  
continued  
What You Need to Know About NetCommand  
1. Connect the device to the TV with an IEEE 1394  
cable first.  
NetCommand setup is optional.  
2. When the New 1394 Device screen appears with the  
Analog Connection check box highlighted, press  
ENTER to enter a check mark. See figure 7, New 1394  
Device screen.  
NetCommand operates by sending signals from the  
TV to your other devices via the IR emitters, telling the  
devices to play, record, change inputs, adjust volume,  
change channels and many more functions. All this  
is accomplished with the TV’s remote control and the  
slide switch left in the TV position.  
3. In the New 1394 Device screen, note the name  
assigned to the device, as you will need to use the  
same name in a later step. See figure 7.  
The IR “Learning” feature of NetCommand allows the  
TV to learn the remote control signals for your A/V  
devices.  
4. Connect the device to the TV with the supplemental  
analog cables.  
NetCommand® can control IEEE 1394 devices by  
sending control signals over a FireWire® cable.  
5. The next screen is the Auto Input Sensing screen  
(see figure 6) in which you can select a name for the  
device. Select the same name you noted in the New  
1394 Device screen (see figure 7).  
You can choose the level of NetCommand control for  
your home theater.  
If you select the wrong name for the device, you  
will be unable to switch between the analog and  
digital inputs to the TV.  
Limited Setup. Perform a limited setup if you:  
Want NetCommand to control only a few  
devices, such as the TV, a playback device  
(like a DVD player), and a cable box. With this  
setup, you can use the TV’s remote control to  
operate these devices.  
If you connect an IEEE 1394 cable box and it  
is detected as CABLE in the New 1394 Device  
screen, be sure to select the name CABLE as the  
name for the analog input and not cablebox.  
Want to use TV Guide On Screen® to control  
your cable box and VCR and/or A/V disc.  
After performing this setup, you can use the  
TV’s remote control to operate these devices.  
Note: If you connected the cables in reverse sequence  
(analog first), you will later need to change the  
input name in the Input Name menu.  
Want the ease and flexibility of NetCommand-  
controlled recording, with seamless setup of  
time-delayed or immediate recordings among  
networked devices.  
a. Switch to any viewing device other than the  
one you wish to change (press INPUT to open  
the Input Selection menu, highlight the input  
icon, and press ENTER).  
Full Setup. Perform a full setup if you want to  
give NetCommand the following additional control:  
b. Open the NetCommand menu and then open  
the Input Name menu.  
Control a surround sound A/V receiver.  
c. Highlight the text box for the analog input  
used for the IEEE 1394 device.  
Automatically change input selections for the  
A/V receiver.  
d. Press  
to scroll through the available  
names to display the name you earlier noted  
for the IEEE 1394 device.  
Initial NetCommand Setup for Most Device  
Types  
e. Press EXIT  
.
To set up an A/V receiver, see “Additional Setup Using  
the NetCommand Menu” later in this chapter.  
For setup later, or to make changes to the setup, see  
“Additional Setup Using the NetCommand Menu” later  
in this chapter.  
1. Connect and position the IR emitters as described in  
chapter 2, “TV Connections.”  
2. Have the remote controls for the TV and the other  
device ready before beginning. Set the TV remote  
control’s slide switch to the TV position.  
3. In the Auto Input sensing screen (see figure 8), high-  
light the Learn button and press ENTER to open the  
Learn screen for the device (see figure 9).  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
41  
NetCommand Specialized Device Keys  
Refer to this chart when “learning” device keys. Write in functions you assign to the F1F4 keys.  
A/V  
Receiver  
Cable, Sat,  
DVD ‡‡  
Learning Screen  
Check Box Name  
Name on  
TV Remote  
VCR  
Function  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Power*  
Power On or Power On/Off  
Power Off  
Volume Up  
Volume Down  
Mute  
POWER**  
POWER**  
Power (Off)*  
Volume Up  
Volume Down  
Mute  
VOL  
VOL  
MUTE  
Automatic (when  
device is selected)  
X
Input (1-4)  
AVR Input Select  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Channel Up  
Channel Down  
Recall  
Channel Scan Up  
CH  
CH  
QV  
Channel Scan Down  
Last Channel Recall  
Program guide, disc menu, or top  
menu  
X
X
Guide  
GUIDE ‡‡‡  
Adjust Up, Down, Left,  
Right  
X
Arrow move Up, Down, Left, Right  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Enter  
Menu  
Enter/Select  
Device Menu or Setup Menu  
Cancel or Exit  
Status Information Display  
Guide Page Up  
Guide Page Down  
List  
ENTER  
MENU **  
CANCEL  
INFO (press twice)  
CH  
CH  
LIST  
Cancel  
Info  
Page Up  
Page Down  
List  
***  
***  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Play  
Play  
(
(
(
(
(
(
PLAY)  
X
X
X
X
X
Stop  
Stop  
STOP  
FAST FORWARD  
REVERSE  
PAUSE  
RECORD  
)
Forward  
Rewind  
Pause  
Record  
Fast Forward/Fwd Search  
Rewind/Reverse Search  
Pause  
)
)
)
Record  
)
X
X
X
X
X
Enter (digits)†  
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0  
Input  
Enter for channel numbers  
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0  
Input Change  
ENTER  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0  
GUIDE**  
Sub-channel separa-  
tor‡  
X
Digital sub-channel  
(—/CANCEL)  
CANCEL  
X
X
X
X
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F1  
ASSIGN YOUR  
CHOICE OF  
SPECIALIZED  
FUNCTIONS  
F2  
F3  
F4  
*
These are paired functions (e.g. Power and Power Off). When the original remote control uses a single button for  
both functions, learn only the first of the paired functions.  
** This function is performed only when the Input Selection Menu is displayed and the device icon is highlighted.  
*** Channel Up/Down as Guide Page Up/Down in effect only after pressing GUIDE; returns to channel functions after  
pressing ENTER or CANCEL.  
If there are two ENTER keys, learn the ENTER key used for channel selection here. The ENTER button on the  
remote sends the correct IR code when digits are entered.  
Learn the sub-channel separator if a special key is used to add a separator (dash or dot) in a digital channel. Press  
the CANCEL button on the remote to add the separator  
‡‡ DVD includes functions for DVD, DVD2, DVR, and HD disc.  
‡‡The GUIDE key is unavailable for a cable box guide when TV Guide On Screen is enabled.  
42  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
and 5 for each additional function you wish to control  
through NetCommand.  
Initial NetCommand® Setup,  
continued  
8. If the device’s remote control has keys that do not  
appear in the list, you can associate up to four keys  
with the F1 through F4 keys. For example, for a DVD  
player, assign the F1 and F2 keys to the DVD player’s  
CHAPTER SKIP FORWARD and CHAPTER SKIP BACK keys. Perform  
NetCommand setup for the  
F
keys the same as you did  
for the named keys  
.
9. Press EXIT to continue with setup for additional devices.  
IMPORTANT  
INPUT 3 is automatically reset each time you  
unplug a device.  
NetCommand  
“Learn” button  
Name you select  
for the device  
Any NetCommand “learning” you may have  
performed for a device connected to INPUT 3  
is lost when you disconnect the device.  
Figure 8. Highlight the Auto Input Sensing screen’s Learn  
button and press ENTER to open the NetCommand Learn  
screen.  
Additional Setup Using the  
NetCommand Menu  
Use the NetCommand menu at any time to:  
See a list of all connections to the TV.  
Set up TV Guide On Screen® or make changes to the setup.  
Add NetCommand control to a device. Use the Learn  
button to open the NetCommand Learn screen for the  
currently selected device.  
Add or remove specific device keys from  
NetCommand control.  
Add NetCommand control to an A/V receiver. When the  
A/V receiver is the audio source, audio from a device  
can be automatically switched to the A/V receiver when  
the device is selected in the TV’s Input Selection menu.  
Figure 9. In the NetCommand Learn screen, you tell the  
TV to remember key commands to send to another device  
via an IR emitter.  
Assign meaningful names to the input icons in the Input  
Selection menu (see chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings”).  
4. The first function highlighted in the Learn screen is  
always Power (On). Aim the TV’s remote control at  
the TV and press ENTER to begin learning for that func-  
tion.  
Change the order of icons in the Input Selection menu  
(see chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings”).  
To open the NetCommand menu, press MENU to first open  
the Main menu, highlight the NetCommand icon, and  
press ENTER. See figure 10.  
5. When the Power (On) text starts flashing, aim the  
device’s remote control at the TV and press and hold  
the POWER key until a check mark appears in the box.  
If the text stops flashing before the check mark  
appears, repeat this step.  
6. If the device has a separate POWER OFF key, press to  
highlight the check box for Power Off. Repeat the  
preceding step to “learn” the POWER OFF key.  
If the device has no POWER OFF key, skip this step.  
By completing “learning” for the power keys, the TV’s  
remote control now operates the power function for  
the device when you set it as the current viewing  
device in the Input Selection menu. Point the remote  
control at the TV to control the device.  
Figure 10. Additional NetCommand setup options are  
accessible through the NetCommand menu.  
7. Press the  
keys on the TV’s remote control  
to highlight other keys on the list. Repeat steps 4  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
43  
3. Select program sources for the listings. You can  
Initial NetCommand® Setup,  
continued  
select one over-the-air source and one cable source  
for TV Guide On Screen. If, however, you have mul-  
tiple cable sources, the channel-number assignments  
may not match up correctly. See the following table  
and notes for the preferred connection combinations.  
Review TV Connections  
You can verify TV connections during TV setup or at  
any time afterward using the Review screen. In the  
The Other Source Can Be:  
If One Source Is:  
NetCommand menu, press  
to highlight Review  
Ant-1 Air  
Ant-2 Air  
and press ENTER  
to display the Review screen (see figure 11).  
Cable Box  
Cable Card  
N/A  
N/A  
Ant-1 Channels via Cable  
Ant-2 Channels via Cable  
N/A  
Note:  
Inputs to TV Guide On Screen can include only one  
over-the-air source and only one cable source.  
TV Guide On Screen listings can be downloaded from:  
An over-the-air antenna or direct cable connected  
to ANT 1 or ANT 2.  
A cable box connected to VIDEO or S-VIDEO on  
INPUT 1, 2, or 3.  
A cable box connected to COMPONENT 1, 2, or  
3 when analog channels are sent to the TV as 480i  
signals.  
Figure 11. The Review screen lists all TV connections.  
IEEE 1394 devices are listed separately on the right.  
Listings cannot be downloaded to the TV from:  
A cable box connected to COMPONENT 1, 2, or  
3 when all channels are sent to the TV as 480p,  
720p, or 1080i signals.  
Set Up TV Guide On Screen®  
Setup of the TV Guide On Screen system is optional.  
A cable box connected to HDMI 1 or HDMI 2.  
A cable box connected to the TV only via IEEE  
1394 cable.  
Many features of TV Guide On Screen are avail-  
able without NetCommand control. For example,  
program listings, program searches, and program  
reminders function without NetCommand.  
If your cable box is connected using one of the incom-  
patible connections noted above, connect an over-  
the-air antenna. The TV will download TV Guide On  
Screen listings for both the cable box and the antenna  
from the antenna connection.  
For full functionality, you must set up NetCommand  
control of any device associated with TV Guide On  
Screen, e.g., a recording device if you wish to set  
up recordings through TV Guide On Screen.  
4. Move to the ZIP Code box and enter the five-digit ZIP  
code for your location. To receive the correct program  
listings for your area, you must enter the ZIP code.  
1. Highlight the Guide button in the NetCommand menu  
and press ENTER to display TV Guide On Screen setup  
options.  
2. To enable the TV Guide On Screen system, highlight  
the On button. If you wish to disable the system, high-  
light the Off button.  
Add or Remove Device Keys from  
NetCommand Control  
1. To “Learn” device keys, you must be watching the  
device. Press INPUT, highlight the icon for the affected  
device, and press ENTER  
.
2. Open the NetCommand menu, highlight the Learn  
button, and press ENTER  
.
3. When the Learn screen displays  
To add keys: Continue as described earlier under  
“Initial NetCommand Setup for Most Device  
Types.”  
To delete keys: Highlight the name of the key you  
wish to delete and press CANCEL on the TV remote  
control. This clears the checkmark to indicate that  
the key has been removed.  
Figure 12. TV Guide On Screen setup  
44  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
5. If your A/V receiver has a separate POWER OFF key, press  
to highlight the check box for Power Off. Repeat  
the preceding step to “learn” the POWER OFF key.  
Additional Setup Using the  
NetCommand Menu, continued  
If your A/V receiver has no POWER OFF key, skip this  
step.  
To Replace One Device with Another on an  
Input Jack  
6. Press to highlight additional check boxes and  
repeat step 4 for the other A/V receiver keys.  
1. Disconnect the device you wish to remove.  
2. Connect the new device to the vacated jack.  
7. When all keys have been learned, press EXIT  
.
3. Before selecting the input from the Input Selec-  
tion menu, open the Input Name menu from the  
NetCommand menu.  
4. Highlight the input name box and press  
a new device name from the list associated with the  
input.  
to select  
5. Press INPUT to open the Input Selection menu. High-  
Figure 13. AV Receiver  
light the input icon and press ENTER  
6. Press MENU and return to the NetCommand menu.  
7. Highlight the Learn button and press ENTER  
.
(AVR) Learn screen. Perform  
NetCommand “learning” for  
these A/V receiver functions.  
.
8. When the Learn screen displays, continue as  
described earlier under “Initial NetCommand Setup for  
Most Device Types.”  
Set Up Automatic Switching of A/V Receiver  
Audio Inputs  
There are two parts to this setup:  
9. Press EXIT when finished.  
Part 1: “Learn” IR codes to control A/V receiver switching  
to the specified A/V receiver audio inputs.  
Other Options on the NetCommand Menu  
For Input Name and Icon Order options, see chapter  
5, “TV Menu Settings.”  
Part 2: Tell the TV where connected devices send audio.  
Because the TV’s Auto Input Sensing feature never detects  
audio connections, the TV does not know that an A/V  
receiver is connected until you perform this procedure.  
Use the PC DVI Input option to specify the type of  
video signal coming from your computer. For more  
about this option, see chapter 7, Using the TV with a  
Personal Computer.”  
The sample setup shown in figure 14 illustrates three  
typical scenarios for sending audio to an A/V receiver:  
Analog Stereo Audio. Audio from sources with only  
analog stereo output (such as a VCR) can be sent  
either directly to the A/V receiver or to the TV first and  
then on to the A/V receiver.  
Set Up NetCommand Control of an A/V  
Receiver  
Perform this setup to:  
Mitsubishi recommends you send audio to the TV first  
as shown in the example. The TV can convert the  
signal to digital audio and then send it to a digital A/V  
receiver.  
Operate the A/V receiver’s power and volume  
functions with the TV’s remote control.  
Enable the A/V receiver to switch automatically to  
the correct audio input when you select a device  
in the TV’s Input Selection menu.  
Audio Available from TV only. Audio from ANT 1  
and ANT 2, memory cards, and IEEE 1394 devices  
can only be sent to the A/V receiver from the TV’s  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT or analog AUDIO OUT  
LEFT/RIGHT. In this setup, you tell NetCommand to  
switch to the A/V receiver’s designated TV audio input  
when using these devices.  
You must have at hand the remote controls for both the TV  
and A/V receiver to perform this procedure.  
Learn A/V Receiver Power and Volume Keys  
1. Connect your A/V receiver to the TV. See chapter 2,  
“TV Connections,” for suggestions.  
Digital Surround Sound. A device (e.g., DVD player,  
cable box, satellite receiver) can send digital surround  
sound such as Dolby Digital or DTS directly to the A/V  
receiver, bypassing the TV entirely. A DVD player is  
used in this example.  
2. Open the NetCommand menu and under AV  
RECEIVER SETUP, highlight Learn and press ENTER  
.
3. In the NetCommand AV Receiver (AVR) Learn screen,  
press to highlight the check box for Power On.  
It is also possible for your setup to include two (or  
more) devices with digital surround sound connected  
directly to the A/V receiver. These devices might be a  
DVD player plus a cable box or satellite receiver.  
4. Press ENTER on the TV’s remote control and while the  
text Power On is flashing, press and hold the POWER  
or POWER ON key on the A/V receiver’s remote control.  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
45  
To delete a letter, highlight it and press CANCEL  
Additional Setup Using the  
or press  
to insert a blank space (underscore  
NetCommand Menu, continued  
character).  
To return the highlight to the first character,  
repeatedly press CANCEL  
To return to the default name, highlight the first  
.
*&&&ꢀꢂꢃꢄꢅꢀ  
%FWJDF  
7$3ꢀXJUIꢀ  
"OBMPHꢀ"VEJP  
%7%ꢀ1MBZFSꢀXJUIꢀ  
%JHJUBMꢀ4VSSPVOEꢀ4PVOE  
character and press CANCEL  
.
A/V receiver com-  
mands the TV can  
send when “learned”  
EJHJUBMꢀPSꢀ  
BOBMPHꢀBVEJPꢀ  
GSPNꢀ57  
57ꢀBVEJPꢀPVU  
A/V  
Receiver  
Audio Inputs  
57  
57ꢀBVEJPꢀ  
JOQVU  
%7%ꢀBVEJPꢀ  
JOQVU  
.FNPSZꢀ$BSET  
*ODPNJOHꢀ  
$PBYJBMꢀ  
$BCMF  
"ꢁ7ꢀ3FDFJWFS  
Text boxes for you to  
enter the name of the associated  
audio input on the A/V receiver  
Figure 14. Overview of A/V receiver connections described  
Figure 15. The AV Receiver (AVR) Learn screen lets you  
set up NetCommand control of your A/V receiver.  
Automatic A/V Receiver Switching, Part 1: Learn IR  
Codes for A/V Receiver Inputs  
7. Press to highlight the check box for Input 2. In  
this example, the IR code for the A/V receiver’s DVD  
Audio input will be “learned” as Input 2.  
1. Connect your A/V receiver to the TV and DVD player.  
See chapter 2, “TV Connections,” for suggestions.  
2. Open the NetCommand menu.  
8. Press ENTER on the TV’s remote control and while the  
text Input 2 is flashing, press and hold the DVD INPUT key  
on the A/V receiver’s remote control.  
3. Highlight the Learn button under AV RECEIVER  
SETUP and press ENTER to display the AV Receiver  
(AVR) Learn screen. See figure 15.  
9. When a check appears in the check box, release the  
When the AV Receiver Learn screen opens, the  
highlight is on the check box for Input 1. The terms  
Input 1Input 4 are generic references to the A/V  
receiver inputs for which the TV can learn IR codes.  
DVD INPUT key.  
10. Press  
the name DVD. Use  
Press ENTER to set each letter.  
to highlight the text box for Input 2. Enter  
to enter the name DVD.  
4. In this example, the IR code for the A/V receiver’s TV  
Audio input will be “learned” as Input 1.  
Press ENTER on the TV’s remote control and while the  
text Input 1 is flashing, press and hold the TV INPUT key  
on the A/V receiver’s remote control.  
Figure 16. Assign names to  
identify “learned” A/V receiver  
audio inputs  
5. When a check appears in the check box, release the  
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 for any additional A/V  
receiver inputs connected to other devices.  
TV INPUT key.  
6. Press  
a name:  
to highlight the text box for Input 1. To enter  
12. Press EXIT to close all menus.  
Use  
on the TV’s remote control to select a  
character.  
Automatic A/V Receiver Switching, Part 2: Tell the TV  
Where Connected Devices Send Audio  
Press ENTER to set the letter and move the highlight  
to the next letter.  
You can assign each A/V receiver input to only one device.  
Most devices are typically set up like the VCR in this  
example, in which analog audio from the device is sent  
through the TV and the input setting is left at the default  
setting None.  
IMPORTANT  
All audio from what you are watching on  
the TV is always available as an output on  
both the TV’s AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT and  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks.  
Analog Stereo Audio (e.g., analog VCR with audio con-  
nected only to the TV: see figure 17)  
To use the surround sound capabilities of your  
A/V receiver however, you must connect your  
DVD player, satellite receiver, or cable box  
directly to the A/V receiver, as surround sound  
may not be available from the TV’s audio output.  
1. Press INPUT to display the Input Selection menu.  
2. Highlight the icon for the VCR and press ENTER to switch  
to the VCR input.  
3. Press MENU and open the NetCommand menu.  
46  
Chapter 3. TV Setup  
memory cards, and IEEE 1394 devices must go to the  
A/V receiver from the TV’s audio outputs as there is  
no way to send the audio directly to the A/V receiver.  
Additional Setup Using the  
NetCommand Menu, continued  
6. Press EXIT to close all menus.  
4. Highlight the text box under AV RECEIVER SETUP.  
5. Confirm that the setting is at None, the default.  
This setting tells the TV to automatically transfer VCR  
audio to the A/V receiver. The TV converts analog  
audio to digital for ouput to a digital A/V receiver.  
Figure 18, Left and below. A/V  
receiver setup indicating that the  
TV’s audio output (DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT or AUDIO OUT  
LEFT/RIGHT) is connected  
to the A/V receiver’s TV audio  
input.  
6. Press EXIT to close all menus.  
Figure 17, left and below. A/V  
receiver setup indicating the  
analog VCR’s audio output is  
automatically sent to the A/V  
receiver via the TV’s audio  
output.  
57  
EJHJUBMꢀPSꢀ  
BOBMPHꢀBVEJPꢀ  
GSPNꢀ57  
Digital Surround Sound (see figure 19)  
57  
1. Press INPUT to display the Input Selection menu.  
2. Highlight the icon for the DVD player and press ENTER  
to switch to the DVD input.  
3. Press MENU and open the NetCommand menu.  
Audio Available from TV Only (see figure 18)  
4. Highlight the text box under AV RECEIVER SETUP.  
1. Press INPUT to display the Input Selection menu.  
5. Press to move through the list to DVD.  
This setting tells the TV that digital surround sound  
from the DVD player is connected directly to the A/V  
receiver’s DVD AUDIO input.  
2. Highlight the icon for an antenna input (ANT 1 or  
ANT 2) and press ENTER to switch to the input. Select  
an antenna input in this step even if you have a cable  
box or satellite receiver connected on the HDMI  
COMPONENT, or INPUT jacks.  
,
6. Press EXIT to close the screen.  
3. Press MENU and open the NetCommand menu.  
4. Highlight the text box under AV RECEIVER SETUP.  
Figure 19, left and below. A/V  
receiver setup indicating the  
DVD player’s audio output is  
connected directly to the A/V  
receiver’s DVD audio input.  
5. Press to move through the list to TV. This is the list  
of A/V receiver inputs you named in the AV Receiver  
(AVR) Learn screen (see figure 15).  
The TV setting here indicates that audio out from  
the TV (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT or AUDIO OUT  
LEFT/RIGHT) is sent to the A/V receiver’s TV  
AUDIO input. Audio from ANT 1 and ANT 2  
,
IMPORTANT  
To hear audio that is sent from the TV to the A/V  
receiver, you must have:  
physically connected the TV to the A/V receiver  
learned the IR codes for the A/V receiver inputs  
chosen the correct input under NetCommand  
AV RECEIVER SETUP  
selected the A/V receiver for audio in the Input  
Selection menu  
4
TV Operation and Features  
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Choosing a Program Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
ChannelView™ Channel Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
TV Signals and Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Memory Card Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
48  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
14. INPUT: Displays the Input Selection menu from which  
Remote Control  
you can select an input source to view, such as an  
antenna input (ANT 1  
(Adjust Up/down/Left/Right): Navigate  
menus and change settings.  
16. ENTER: Selects a channel number or menu item.  
Displays or removes ChannelView™ channel listing  
With the TV Guide On Screen  
/2) or a connected device.  
Overview  
Figures 1, next page  
15.  
1. Slide Switch: Selects the A/V device to be controlled  
by the remote control. Set the slide switch to TV for  
operation of the TV, NetCommand-controlled devices,  
and IEEE 1394 devices. Control of additional devices  
requires programing (see Appendix D, “Programming  
the Remote Control.”.  
17. GUIDE  
:
for ANT 1 and ANT 2  
.
system enabled, launches TV Guide On Screen. Dis-  
plays DVD disc or top menu for a NetCommand-con-  
trolled DVD player.  
2. SLEEP: Sets the TV to turn off within 2 hours. See the  
18. INFO: Displays an on-screen summary of the current  
device in use and any broadcast information available,  
including current V-Chip information. See chapter 4,  
“TV Operation and Features,” for details.  
next page for instructions.  
3. Digits/Letters: Allow you to tune to a channel by  
entering channel numbers; press ENTER for faster  
tuning. Use numbers and the —/CANCEL key to enter  
digital sub-channels. Also use for entering informa-  
tion into menus.  
19. AUDIO: Selects individual audio settings for adjustment.  
20. VIDEO: Selects individual video settings for adjustment.  
21. MENU: Displays the main TV menu using the  
on-screen menu system. When a sub-menu is open,  
backs up one level.  
To select letters when naming channels, repeatedly  
press the associated number key. The following  
special characters are available with the  
1
and keys:  
0
22. EXIT: Closes all TV on-screen menus and displays and  
1:  
0:  
!
/
&
*
blank space  
-
returns to normal TV viewing.  
23. F1–F4  
4. —/CANCEL (SUB-CHANNEL/CANCEL): When entering digital  
For devices under NetCommand control: Perform  
NetCommand “Learning” to assign functions to the  
F1F4 keys.  
channel numbers, adds a separator between main  
and sub-channel numbers. Clears FAV and some  
menu entries.  
For devices operating independently of  
NetCommand: The F1 F4 keys may be able to work  
like the A, B, C, D buttons on some cable boxes,  
satellite receivers, and DVD players. Program the  
remote control for your equipment and test the keys.  
See Appendix D, “Programming the Remote Control.”  
5. POWER: Turns TV power on and off.  
6. QV (QuickView™): Switches between the current  
channel and the last channel viewed.  
7. MUTE: Turns TV sound off or on.  
8. SPLIT: Turns Split Screen mode on and off.  
9. VOL  
/
(Volume Up/Down): Changes sound level.  
25.  
(PAUSE): Freezes a broadcast TV picture when no  
Split Screen image is displayed. When Split Screen is  
displayed, freezes the sub-picture. See below for use  
with recordable media.  
10. CH/PAGE  
/
(Channel or Page Up/Down): Scans  
up or down through memorized channels. Pages up  
and down through screens when used with the TV  
Guide On Screen system or ChannelView™.  
Record/Playback Keys  
Use any of these methods to enable the recording and  
playback functions:  
11 FAV (Favorites): Scans through memorized lists of  
favorite channels. See “Channel Menu” in chapter 5,  
“TV Menu Settings,” for more information.  
program the remote for your DVR, VCR, or DVD player/  
12. FORMAT: Changes the shape and size of the main TV  
picture. When in Split Screen mode, changes the  
size of the split images while maintaining their aspect  
ratios.  
recorder and set the slide switch to VCR  
,
DVD, CABLE, or  
SAT  
.
Perform NetCommand “Learning” for the device.  
See chapter 6, “NetCommand Operations,” for control  
of IEEE 1394 devices.  
13. LIST: Works like the LIST key for a cable box or satellite  
receiver when “learned” for NetCommand or when the  
remote has been programmed for the device.  
24.  
(
(
RECORD): Records with a VCR, DVR, or DVD recorder.  
25.  
PAUSE): Pauses a VCR, DVR, or DVD. See above  
for use during TV viewing.  
Note: To operate other audio/video devices.  
26.  
27.  
(
(
STOP): Stops play of a VCR, DVR, or DVD.  
See chapter 3, “TV Setup,” for NetCommand  
“Learning” of device keys.  
REVERSE): Rewinds a VCR. Reverse scans a DVR  
or DVD.  
See Appendix D, “Programming the Remote  
Control” for instructions on programming.  
28.  
29.  
(
(
PLAY): Plays a VCR, DVR, or DVD.  
FAST FORWARD): Fast forwards a VCR. Forward  
For control of IEEE 1394 devices, see chapter 6.  
scans a DVR or DVD.  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
49  
Remote Control, continued  
5
7
1
2
12  
8
5
6
9
3
4
10  
15  
16  
7
8
11  
12  
13  
21  
22  
17  
18  
9
14  
10  
15  
16  
19  
20  
17  
18  
4. Press SLEEP to view the time remaining before the sleep  
timer turns off the TV.  
21  
22  
Cancelling the Sleep Timer  
24 25 26  
27 28 29  
1. Press SLEEP to display the on-screen message.  
2. Press SLEEP repeatedly until OFF is displayed.  
Note: After five seconds of inactivity, the message box  
will disappear.  
23  
FAV (Favorite Channels)  
For use of the FAV feature with the remote control, see  
chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings,” and the explanation of the  
Channel menu.  
Figure 1. Remote Control Overview  
Resetting the Remote Control  
If the slide switch is set to TV and the TV does not respond  
properly, do the following to reset the remote control.  
Sleep Timer  
Setting the Sleep Timer  
1. Press and hold POWER for several seconds until the  
1. Press SLEEP on the remote control.  
button blinks twice and goes off.  
2. Press SLEEP additional times to increase the time in  
30-minute increments up to the maximum of 120  
minutes.  
2. Release the POWER button.  
3. Press keys  
0
0
9
3
5
and the POWER button will blink  
twice when you finish entering the code. While enter-  
ing the code, pause for a moment between each key  
press to ensure it is recognized.  
3. Press EXIT or wait five seconds without pressing any  
buttons for the message to disappear.  
Low-Battery Indicator  
If you press a key and see the POWER key blink five times,  
replace the remote control’s batteries.  
50  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
Analog channel name is displayed if you entered a name in  
the Channel menu.  
Choosing a Program Source  
NOTE: If your only viewing sources are connected to the  
ANT 1 and ANT 2 antenna jacks, you can switch  
inputs without the Input Selection menu. Press  
INPUT to switch between ANT 1 and ANT 2. To  
verify which is the current source while watching  
TV, press INFO to see the on-screen status display.  
Note: If limited data is shown or no program data ap-  
pears, it is because the broadcaster is not sending  
the information. This is not a defect of your TV.  
Using ChannelView  
Feature  
Instructions  
Selecting from Multiple Sources: The Input  
Selection Menu  
View listings while viewing  
ANT 1 or ANT 2.  
Press GUIDE.  
The Input Selection menu allows you to select an input to  
watch on the TV. The current input appears as a gold-  
colored icon.  
Scan through memorized  
channels one by one.  
Press or  
.
Scan quickly through memo-  
rized channels.  
Press PAGE  
/
.
1. Press INPUT on the TV’s remote control to display the  
Input Selection menu (Figure 2).  
View detailed information for Press or to highlight  
2. To select a different input, press  
on the TV’s  
digital channels.  
a channel and press  
.
remote control to move the highlight through icons in  
the input section.  
Return to viewing basic list-  
ings information  
Press  
.
3. Press ENTER to switch to the device and close the menu.  
More About the Input Selection Menu  
To assign meaningful labels to the icons, such as  
“VCR” or “DVD,” see the “Input Name” section of  
chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings.”  
To rearrange the icons, see the “Icon Order” section of  
chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings.”  
To use with NetCommand-controlled devices, includ-  
ing IEEE 1394/DTVLink devices, see additional infor-  
mation in chapter 6, “NetCommand Operations.”  
Figure 3. ChannelView screen, current programs. Use  
to exchange displays for current and future programs.  
Input Section  
Audio Section  
Figure 2. Input Selection menu. See chapter 6,  
“NetCommand Functions,” for use of the Audio section.  
ChannelView™ Channel Listings  
Figure 4. ChannelView screen, future programs on the  
selected channel (digital channels only)  
ChannelView provides listings, as sent by broadcast-  
ers, for memorized channels on ANT 1 or ANT 2.  
ChannelView is available  
IMPORTANT  
for an antenna input not assigned to the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
To receive ChannelView updates: Set the  
Energy Mode to Fast Power On and leave the  
TV powered off for a while each day. If the TV  
loses power, program listings will be lost until  
the next update.  
When the TV Guide On Screen system is disabled.  
Channels are marked with either a D for digital channels  
or an A for analog channels. Digital channels are shown  
with the major channel and sub-channels (or bitstreams).  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
51  
Status Display  
The on-screen status display appears when you turn on  
the TV, change inputs, change channels, or press the INFO  
button on the remote control. The most common displays  
are shown below. Seldom or never do all the status indi-  
cators appear at the same time.  
13  
11  
3
2
Analog Program  
1
4
Ant-1 3 XXXX  
480i Standard  
Stereo SAP  
XXXXXXXXXX  
5
ANT-1 3  
1. Source Antenna or Input  
2. Analog Channel being received (If an antenna  
source)  
3. Channel Name (if named in the Channel menu or  
provided by TV Guide On Screen)  
4. Signal Type Being Received. Possible:  
6
7
9
TV-PG DLSV  
FAV2  
8
Monday 11:00 AM  
Sleep: 30  
From ANT-1 ANT-2, or INPUT jacks: 480i  
,
10  
12  
From COMPONENT jacks: 480i, 480p, 720p,  
1080i  
MUTE  
5. Screen Format in use  
Possible:  
Analog 480i /480p signals: Standard, Expand,  
Zoom, Stretch, Stretch Plus, Narrow  
720p/1080i signals: Standard, Wide Expand  
6. Stereo and/or SAP being broadcast. In Split Screen  
mode, the speaker icon is on either the left or right  
to indicate the sound source.  
8. Channel is in current FAV bank (FAV bank 2)  
9. Day and Time  
10. Sleep Timer remaining time  
11. Split Screen picture source and channel  
12. Audio Mute on  
13. Program name (if provided by TV Guide On Screen)  
7. V-Chip Ratings  
2
6
1
Digital Program  
Ant-1 42-1 XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
1. Digital Major and Sub-Channel Number  
2. Digital Channel Name (if broadcast or provided by  
TV Guide On Screen)  
3. Signal Type Being Received  
Possible: SD 4:3, SD 16:9, HD  
3
HD Standard  
4
5
English  
TV-PG DLSV Copy Never  
FAV2  
7
4. Screen Format in Use  
Monday 11:00 AM  
Sleep: 30  
Possible:  
SD 4:3: Standard, Expand, Zoom, Stretch, Stretch  
Plus, Narrow  
SD 16:9 or HD 16:9: Standard, Wide Expand  
5. Language(s) being broadcast  
6. Program Name (if broadcast or provided by TV  
Guide On Screen)  
7. Copy-Protection Status. Possible:  
Copy Once: Program can be recorded  
Copy Never: Program can never be recorded; may  
display program retention period.  
Digital IEEE 1394 Device  
DVCR  
HD Standard  
English  
TV-PG DLSV Copy No More  
Play 01:20:15  
1. Status of D-VHS VCR or IEEE 1394 device  
2. Counter of D-VHS VCR  
3. Special message line (shows only when a special  
message is needed; may be seen with analog  
signals)  
4. Copy-Protection Status. Possible:  
Copy Once: Program can be recorded  
Copy No More: Program can never be recorded;  
program may be movable.  
4
1
3
2
Monday 11:00 AM  
Sleep: 30  
Special Message Line  
52  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
Split Screen  
Split Screen allows you to view pictures from two different  
sources at the same time. Split Screen is available when  
you have video sources connected to the TV in addition to  
connections on ANT 1 or ANT 2  
.
Operation  
Split Screen Operations  
Instructions  
Press SPLIT  
.
Turn Split Screen on or off  
Press or . The speaker icon appears briefly to indicate the  
sound source as either the main picture (left) or sub-picture  
(right). The sound source is the side you can control with the  
remote control.  
Switch the sound source between main  
and sub-pictures.  
Press INFO. The speaker icon appears in the information display to indi-  
cate the sound source.  
Check which picture is the sound source.  
1. Press to make the sub-picture the sound source.  
2. Press INPUT and move the highlight to the icon for the input you wish  
to view as the sub-picture (see figure 6).  
Change the source of the sub-picture.  
Change sub-picture channel (when the  
3. Press ENTER to make the change.  
Grayed-out input icons are unavailable as Split Screen sources or with  
the current source.  
Press to make the sub-picture the sound source then press CH  
/
.
input source is ANT 1 ANT 2, or a  
,
NetCommand-controlled cable box or  
satellite receiver).  
Freeze or unfreeze the sub-picture.  
Press  
(
PAUSE). Press  
again to return to normal moving video.  
Change the size of the main and sub-  
pictures.  
Repeatedly press FORMAT to cycle through picture sizes. See the follow-  
ing page for sample displays.  
1. Press to make the sub-picture the sound source.  
Make the sub picture fill the screen.  
2. Press SPLIT to close Split Screen mode.  
“SPLIT” appears under the  
Choice of Split Screen  
sub-Picture Sources  
Video icon to distinguish  
this menu from the Input  
Selection menu.  
IMPORTANT  
Split Screen is unavailable if your only  
inputs are ANT 1 and ANT 2.  
A 1080p signal from an HDMI jack or a per-  
sonal computer can be viewed only as the  
main picture.  
The main picture and sub-picture cannot  
both be from the HDMI inputs.  
Figure 5. Change the source of the sub-picture with the  
Split Screen Input Selection menu.  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
53  
Split Screen Displays  
16:9 Main Picture/  
4:3 Sub-Picture  
16:9 Main Picture/  
16:9 Sub-Picture  
4:3 Main Picture/  
4:3 Sub-Picture  
4:3 Main Picture/  
16:9 Sub-Picture  
16:9 Main  
Picture  
16:9 Main  
16:9 Sub-  
4:3  
4:3  
16:9 Sub-  
Picture  
4:3 Main  
Picture  
4:3 Main  
Picture  
Picture  
Picture  
Sub-Picture  
Sub-Picture  
16:9 Main  
Picture  
16:9 Main  
Picture  
4:3  
16:9 Sub-  
Picture  
16:9 Sub-  
Picture  
4:3  
4:3 Main Picture  
4:3 Main Picture  
Sub-Picture  
Sub-Picture  
16:9 Main  
Picture  
4:3  
16:9 Main  
Picture  
16:9 Sub-  
Picture  
16:9 Sub-  
Picture  
4:3 Main  
Picture  
4:3  
4:3 Main  
Picture  
Sub-Picture  
Sub-Picture  
Display choices. Press the FORMAT key  
repeatedly while in Split Screen mode to  
view different displays.  
TV Inputs for Split Screen  
The available Split Screen picture sources are listed below.  
Sub-Picture  
Main  
Picture  
HDMI  
(no 1080p) (1080p)  
HDMI  
ANT 1  
ANT 2  
INPUT  
COMPONENT  
IEEE 1394  
ANT 1  
ANT 2  
INPUT  
*
COMPONENT  
HDMI (no 1080p)  
HDMI (1080p) ‡  
**  
PC-DVI  
IEEE 1394  
Only when main picture and sub-picture are from different INPUT jacks.  
** Only when main picture and sub-picture are from different COMPONENT jacks.  
*
HDMI 1080p and PC-DVI appear only as main picture in the Split Screen combinations marked in the  
second row of screens above under “Split Screen Displays.”  
Check marks indicate combinations of picture sources you can view in Split Screen mode.  
54  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
TV Display Format Definitions  
TV Signals and Display Formats  
Standard: This is the full-screen format. HDTV signals  
use this format. This format is useful for displaying  
Anamorphic DVDs that have 1.78:1 or 1.85:1 aspect  
ratios. Anamorphic DVDs that have a 2.35:1 aspect ratio  
are displayed with black bars at the top and bottom, but  
show the entire image correctly. Narrow (4:3) images  
are stretched evenly from side to side. Available for all  
signals.  
This is a widescreen TV, also known as a 16:9 TV. This  
shape reflects the new types of images available from  
HDTV and many DVDs. There are still many older style  
narrow-screen images (called 4:3 aspect ratio) you will  
encounter. While there is no perfect solution for dis-  
playing a squarish, narrower image on a wide screen,  
Mitsubishi offers several display formats from which you  
can choose.  
Expand: This enlarges the picture to fill the screen, crop-  
ping off some of the image at the top and bottom. This  
is useful for reducing the letter box top and bottom bars  
of non-anamorphic DVD images. Available for 480i, 480p,  
and digital SD 4:3 signals only.  
Press FORMAT on the TV remote control to cycle through the  
available display formats. The last-used format for each  
device is used when you return to that device.  
Note:  
Only standard format is available for Split Screen.  
PC formats vary depending on the PC signal.  
For 1080p signals from an HDMI input, see “Com-  
puter Display Formats” in chapter 7, Using the TV  
with a Personal Computer.”  
Zoom: This enlarges the picture, cropping off some of  
the image at each side and top and bottom. This is useful  
for removing or reducing the black top and bottom bars  
on anamorphic DVDs with a 2.35:1 aspect ratio. Available  
for 480i, 480p, and SD 4:3 signals only.  
Stretch: This format stretches a narrow (4:3) image  
across the screen; there is less stretch in the center than  
at the sides, however. This allows the entire narrow image  
to be displayed across the screen with less distortion than  
is seen in the Standard format. Available for 480i, 480p,  
and SD 4:3 signals only.  
DVD Definitions  
Anamorphic (or Enhanced for WideScreen TV)  
These DVDs are recorded in a special way to properly  
show widescreen images on 16:9 TV sets using the  
Standard format mode. This is the recommended viewing  
choice.  
Stretch Plus: Similar to stretch mode, but to minimize  
distortions on the side, the picture is expanded to crop off  
portions of the top and bottom. Except when displaying  
Non-Anamorphic (or 4:3, 1:33:1, Letter Box, or Full  
Screen)  
These DVDs are recorded for use with traditionally  
shaped, squarish TVs. They may be full screen (4:3 or  
1:33:1) which crops movies to fit the narrow TV, or letter  
box, which adds black top and bottom bars.  
menus or Split Screen, press  
to adjust the position of  
the picture vertically. Available for 480i, 480p, and SD 4:3  
signals only.  
Narrow: This format displays narrow (4:3) images in their  
original shape, and adds stationary black side bars to fill  
the screen. Available for 480i, 480p, and SD 4:3 signals  
only.  
This information may be listed on the DVD case. Some  
DVDs support both types of recordings.  
Wide Expand: Enlarges the picture, cropping some of  
the image on both sides. This Expand format is useful  
to remove or reduce black side bars added to narrow  
images that are converted to 16:9 signals for digital  
broadcast. Available for 1080i, 720p, digital SD 16:9 and  
digital HD signals.  
Signal Definitions  
480i Signals: Traditional analog interlaced signals from  
or through ANT-1 and  
and HDMI jacks.  
2
,
INPUT 1  
3
,
COMPONENT  
480p Signals: Progressive-scan DVD signals on COM-  
PONENT and HDMI jacks.  
720p and 1080i Signals: High-definition signals received  
through COMPONENT and HDMI jacks. These  
signals are always 16:9 (widescreen).  
SD 4:3: Standard-definition narrow-screen format signals  
from digital channels and IEEE 1394 devices.  
Note: All high-definition channels send widescreen (16:9)  
signals, but not all programming sent on these  
channels was created for this format. As a result,  
the broadcaster must convert such programming  
for broadcast, and may stretch the image or add  
side bars to fill the widescreen area.  
SD 16:9: Standard-definition widescreen format signals  
from digital channels and IEEE 1394 devices.  
HD: High-definition wide-screen format signals from digital  
channels and IEEE-1394 devices. These signals are always  
16:9 (widescreen).  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
55  
TV Display Formats  
See descriptions on the preceding page.  
03*(*/"-ꢀ4*(/"-  
"OBNPSQIJDꢀ%7%  
03*(*/"-ꢀ4*(/"-  
/POꢁBOBNPSQIJDꢀPSꢀ4%ꢀꢂꢃꢄ  
57ꢀ%JTQMBZ  
57ꢀ%JTQMBZ  
4UBOEBSE  
4UBOEBSE  
OPUꢀSFDPNNFOEFEꢁꢀEJTUPSUFEꢂ  
SFDPNNFOEFEꢂ  
OPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀOPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀꢀPSꢀ  
BOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
&YQBOE  
&YQBOE  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ SFDPNNFOEFEꢀGPSꢀMFUUFSCPYFEꢂ  
OPUꢀSFDPNNFOEFEꢁꢀEJTUPSUFEꢂ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀOPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀBOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
;PPN  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀOPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
;PPN  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ OPUꢀSFDPNNFOEFEꢁꢀEJTUPSUFEꢂ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ SFDPNNFOEFEꢀGPSꢀBOBNPSQIJDꢀꢈꢋꢌꢍꢅꢃꢂ  
OPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPS  
)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
BOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
4USFUDI  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀOPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
4USFUDI  
SFDPNNFOEFEꢀGPSꢀTUBOEBSEꢀCSPBEDBTUꢂ  
OPUꢀSFDPNNFOEFEꢁꢀEJTUPSUFEꢂ  
OPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
BOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀOPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
4USFUDIꢀ1MVT  
4USFUDIꢀ1MVT  
SFDPNNFOEFEꢀGPSꢀTUBOEBSEꢀCSPBEDBTUꢂ  
OPUꢀSFDPNNFOEFEꢁꢀEJTUPSUFEꢂ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀOPUꢀBWBJMBCMFꢀGPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ)%ꢁꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢀPSꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀBOBMPHꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢁꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
/BSSPX  
/BSSPX  
OPUꢀSFDPNNFOEFEꢁꢀEJTUPSUFEꢂ  
4UBOEBSE  
0SJHJOBMꢀ)%ꢀPSꢀ4%ꢀ  
ꢃꢄꢅꢆꢁꢀꢇꢈꢉQꢀPSꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJ  
BWBJMBCMFꢀPOMZꢀGPSꢀ  
EJHJUBMꢀ4%ꢀꢃꢄꢅꢆꢁꢀ)%ꢁꢀ  
BOBMPHꢀꢃꢉꢊꢉJꢀPSꢀꢇꢈꢉQ  
8JEFꢀ&YQBOE  
XJUIꢀTJEFꢀCBSTꢀJOꢀCSPBEDBTUꢂ  
SFDPNNFOEFEꢀUPꢀSFNPWFꢀTJEFꢀCBSTꢂ  
56  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
Viewing Pictures  
Memory Card Playback  
Using the Picture Thumbnail Menu  
1. Press GUIDE on the remote control to display the JPEG  
Memory Card Reader  
picture Thumbnail menu. See figure 7.  
Inserting a memory card  
2. Press  
images; CH  
to move the highlight to different  
changes pages of the Thumbnail  
1. If the card has a write-protection lock switch, first  
unlock the card. Insert the card into a matching card  
slot on the front of the TV. Be sure to use the correct  
card slot. See the table below. Normally the label  
side should be up, but if the card does not fit, try  
turning the card over and insert again. When properly  
inserted, the light next to the slot will light up and the  
TV will automatically switch to the card display. Cards  
up to 1 GB, with a file format of FAT 16 (block size =  
1024 or 2048) are supported.  
/
menu. Use  
to go to the first slide and  
to go to  
the last slide.  
3. Press FORMAT to rotate the selected image 90˚ (pressing  
FORMAT four times rotates the image completely around  
to the original position).  
4. Press  
to begin playback of the slide show starting  
with the selected image.  
CARD 1  
CARD 2  
SmartMedia™  
MultiMediaCard™  
Secure Digital (SD)  
CARD 3  
CARD 4  
CompactFlash® (Types I and II) Memory Stick PRO™  
Microdrive® Memory Stick™  
2. Next, the Media Dialog box (figure 6) automatically  
displays. Use the AUDIO key to switch to MP3 or WMA  
audio playlist setup or use the VIDEO key to switch to  
JPEG slide show setup.  
Do not pull the memory card out while it is playing.  
Figure 7. JPEG Thumbnails  
Keys for JPEG Picture Slide Show  
Begin or resume slide show playback  
Figure 6. Media  
dialog box, slide  
show mode. A  
similar dialog box  
appears when in  
audio mode.  
Pause or resume playback while in the auto-  
matic advance mode.  
Advance to the next slide.  
Go to the previous slide.  
FORMAT  
Single press rotates the slide 90˚ clockwise.  
Multiple presses continue to rotate the slide.  
3. On the remote control, press:  
Start the slide show or play audio.  
Stop slide show, display media dialog box.  
GUIDE  
Display the JPEG Thumbnail menu (see figure 7)  
or Audio track playlist (see figure 8)  
Compatible Picture Files (JPEG Pictures up to 1 GB)  
Still images recorded on digital cameras using the  
Exchangeable Image File Format, version 2.1 (EXIF 2.1)  
standard for digital still cameras and Design Rules for  
Camera File Systems version 1.0 (DCF 1.0)  
FORMAT  
When Media Dialog Box is open, display the  
Media Setup menu (see figure 9).  
When screen is blank, display the Media Dialog  
Box (see figure 6).  
Some images opened and resaved on a computer may  
not play back or may not be able to display a picture in  
the thumbnail list because the computer program that  
opened and resaved the images changed the file to an  
incompatible format.  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
INFO  
Switch from audio mode to slide show mode.  
Switch from slide show mode to audio mode.  
Display on-screen status for the memory card.  
INPUT  
Open the Input Selection menu to select a dif-  
ferent device to watch.  
Standard digital images with a maximum size 5 mega-  
pixels for each image, or 2560 x 1920 pixels. Pictures  
Warning: Some memory cards available on the market are not properly certified to the card specifications noted and cannot  
be used by the card reader. If you experience problems reading your file, please transfer your files to a properly certified card.  
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features  
Compatible Audio Files (MP3 or WMA)  
57  
Memory Card Playback, continued  
Files recorded with sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz  
will be scaled to the TV display. Some pictures may  
be cropped to fit.  
or 48 kHz.  
Files recorded with fixed bit rates  
File names with .mp3 or .wma extensions  
Full path file names can be no longer than 50 char-  
acters and must end in a .jpg extension. Not all 50  
characters will display.  
NOTE:  
Images stored on cards larger than 256MB can take a  
longer initial time to display.  
During MP3 audio playback, audio from the  
card is sent to the A/V receiver as analog audio.  
Digital out is not available.  
Repetitive noise may be present when playing  
WMA digital audio files from memory cards.  
Playing Audio  
Using the Audio Playlist Menu  
1. Press GUIDE to display the Playlist menu.  
Media Setup Menu  
In the Media setup menu you can adjust the slide show  
display, frequency, or interval, or the playlist frequency.  
To display the Media Setup menu, press MENU twice from  
a blank screen to first display the Media Dialog box. Next  
press FORMAT. Press FORMAT again to close the Media Setup  
menu. Press MENU on the remote control to redisplay the  
Media Dialog Box.  
2. Press  
to select different tracks; CH  
/
changes pages of the Playlist. Use  
first track on the page and  
on the page.  
to go to the  
to go to the last track  
3. Press  
to begin playback. The song currently  
playing is highlighted.  
JPEG Picture Slide Show Setup  
For JPEG picture slide show playback, select Auto-  
matic or Manual advance. For manual operation,  
press  
or ENTER to advance to the next slide.  
For automatic advance, select the frequency or  
number of times to show the complete slide show,  
Once, Twice or Continuously.  
For automatic advance, select the interval time each  
slide is shown, for example, five seconds, or 30  
seconds  
MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist Setup  
Figure 8. Audio Playlist  
Select the frequency or number of times to play the com-  
plete playlist. Once, Twice or Continuously.  
Keys for MP3 or WMA Audio Playback  
Begin or resume playlist playback.  
Pause or resume playback.  
Advance to the next track/song.  
Go to the previous track/song.  
Stop playback and display media dialog box..  
Figure 9. Media Setup menu  
IMPORTANT  
JPEG images cannot be edited through  
the TV. When editing on a personal com-  
puter, make name changes only to avoid  
file incompatibility.  
MP3 files must have at least a 32-kHz  
sampling rate.  
5
TV Menu Settings  
3D Graphical  
Menu System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
NetCommand Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Captions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Parental Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Setting a Pass Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Lock TV by Time and Front-Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Rating Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Bypassing the Ratings Lock and Lock by Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
V-Chip Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Audio/Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Audio Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
60  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
3D Graphical  
Menu System  
Your TV has Mitsubishi’s exclusive 3D Graphical  
on-screen operating system, which provides on-screen  
information for menu choices and changes using the TV’s remote control.  
Menu Screens  
The  
tures:  
system includes the following special fea-  
A picture (icon) is highlighted on the menu  
screen when selected with the directional  
The currently selected icon or button is highlighted  
with a yellow outline; the text color is yellow.  
arrows  
. You may then make  
On-screen instructions, shown in the message line at  
the bottom of the menu, provide feature selection and  
adjustment information.  
changes within the menu or access sub-  
menus, if available.  
You can also open sub-menus from a  
button. Sometimes when you select a  
button, an automatic function begins.  
Some on-screen menu options must be set before  
other options are available.  
Remote Control Buttons  
The following buttons on the remote control help you navigate within the  
system:  
6
Key  
Function  
7
Display or close the Main menu or move back  
one menu screen at a time.  
1
MENU  
2
3
Close all menus and return to TV viewing.  
EXIT  
to select a menu item to change.  
(Adjust Left/Right Keys)  
4
4
5
3
3
4
to change the settings.  
to scroll through pre-set text-box entries.  
(Adjust Up/Down Keys)  
Open a menu, start an automatic function, or  
select a check box.  
5
ENTER  
1
2
Enter custom names in some text boxes.  
6
7
Numbers, Letters  
Clear a setting or stop an automatic function.  
CANCEL  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
61  
Main Menu  
Press MENU on the remote control to open the Main menu,  
figure 1. See below for an overview of the options available  
through the Main menu.  
Figure 1. Main menu.  
Setup  
Channel  
Select English or Spanish for menus and  
on-screen displays.  
Edit channels for the ANT 1 and ANT 2  
Memorize the available channels for the  
antenna or cable service connected to the  
ANT 1 and ANT 2 jacks.  
Set the TV’s internal clock either manually  
or have the TV set the clock automatically.  
Set the TV Timer to turn on the TV auto-  
matically at a designated time.  
inputs.  
Manually add or delete channels from  
memory, name analog channels, or add  
your favorite channels to a FAV (Favorites)  
list.  
View signal strength of a currently tuned  
digital channel.  
Set the energy mode for power consump-  
tion when the TV is powered off.  
Turn off Demo Mode.  
Captions  
Display closed captions (if sent by the  
broadcaster).  
View the TV’s software version.  
Select settings for analog or digital cap-  
tions.  
See chapter 3, “TV Setup,” for use of the Setup  
menu.  
Parental Lock  
NetCommand  
Block or allow programming based on  
rating signals sent by the broadcast station.  
Lock the TV by time.  
See a review list of all connections to the  
TV.  
Set up TV Guide On Screen® or make  
changes to the setup.  
Lock the front-panel buttons.  
Assign meaningful names to the input icons  
in the Input Selection menu.  
Change the order of icons in the Input  
Selection menu.  
Perform NetCommand “Learning” setup.  
Associate A/V receiver inputs with devices  
to enable automatic audio switching.  
Audio/Video  
Reset a selected input’s A/V memory to the  
original factory settings.  
Customize individual audio and video set-  
tings.  
Display a blue screen when viewing a  
device with no video signal or a poor video  
signal.  
Enable/disable Film Mode.  
Turn the TV speakers on or off.  
See chapter 3, “TV Setup,” for more on use of  
the NetCommand menu.  
Record  
Set up a NetCommand-controlled record-  
ing.  
View a list of scheduled recordings.  
Set the default digital recording device.  
Select anamorphic or cropped format for  
analog recordings.  
See chapter 6, “NetCommand Functions,” for  
use of the Record menu.  
62  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Setup Menu  
See chapter 3, “TV Setup,” for use of the Setup menu.  
NetCommand Menu  
The features described in this section are available even if  
you have not performed NetCommand setup. See chapter  
3, “TV Setup,” for options available for NetCommand-  
controlled devices.  
Figure 4. Input Name menu  
Review TV Connections  
(no NetCommand setup required)  
To rename an input  
Press  
to highlight Review and press ENTER to  
1. If you are currently watching the input you wish to  
rename, first change to another input. To do so, press  
INPUT to open the Input Selection menu, highlight a dif-  
display the Review screen (see figure 2).  
ferent input, and press ENTER  
.
2. With the Input Name menu displayed, press  
to  
move the highlight to the box for the input you wish to  
rename.  
3. Press  
to select from the following list.  
Cable Box  
Game  
Camcorder  
DVD  
DVD2  
HD Disc  
Satellite  
VCR  
DVR (digital video  
recorder, recordable DVD)  
Only one VCR label is available, so If you have a  
second VCR connected, leave the name as the default  
name.  
Figure 2. The Review screen lists all TV connections.  
IEEE 1394 inputs are listed separately on the right.  
To Replace One Device with Another on an Input Jack  
Input Name Menu  
(no NetCommand setup required)  
1. Disconnect the device you wish to remove from the  
TV.  
Use the Input Name menu to assign useful labels to the  
TV inputs that appear in the Input Selection menu. See  
figures 3 and 4. The current viewing device and any  
unused inputs appear grayed out and unselectable in the  
Input Name menu.  
2. Connect the new device to the vacated jack.  
3. Open the Input Name menu from the NetCommand  
menu.  
4. Select a device name from the list for the input.  
5. Open the Review screen and confirm the change.  
To Remove the Icon for an HDMI Device  
When you disconnect an HDMI device, the icon remains in  
the Input Selection menu until you choose to remove it.  
1. In the Input Name menu (see figure 4), highlight the  
box for the disconnected HDMI input.  
2. Press  
to select Off.  
3. Press MENU to return to the NetCommand menu or  
press EXIT to close all menus.  
IMPORTANT  
Icon for the Icon Order menu  
Icon for the Input Name menu  
It is possible to use the same name for more  
than one input. To avoid confusion, be sure  
to use different names for each input.  
Figure 3. The Input Name menu and Icon Order menu are  
accessible through the NetCommand menu.  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
63  
NetCommand Menu, continued  
Icon Order Menu  
(no NetCommand setup required)  
Record Menu  
The Record menu allows you to set defaults for NetCom-  
mand-controlled recordings. For an explanation of the  
Record menu, see chapter 6, “NetCommand Functions.”  
The Icon Order menu allows you to rearrange the device  
icons that appear in the Input Selection menu. Change  
the sequence to put frequently used icons at the start of  
the list. See figures 3 and 5.  
To change the icon order  
1. Press  
to highlight the icon to be moved and  
then press ENTER  
.
2. Press  
to drag the icon to the desired posi-  
tion. Press ENTER to set the new position.  
Figure 5. Icon Order menu  
64  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Press CH  
/
to review the channels in memory. Press  
to select Added or Deleted for the channel shown in  
the Channel box.  
Channel Menu  
To Add a New Digital Channel  
1. n the channel menu, enter the physical channel number in  
I
the Channel box, including the sub-channel number;  
press CANCEL and then enter the sub-channel number.  
If no sub-channel is specified, press  
and 1.  
CANCEL  
2. Press ENTER to tune to the channel.  
3. Highlight the Added radio button to add the channel  
to memory.  
Name  
Settings for the Channel  
Number Shown  
Signal-Strength  
(digital channels only)  
FAV Memory  
Banks  
Analog channels from ANT 1 and ANT 2 can be named  
with up to four characters. The name you enter here will  
appear on the TV screen as part of the on-screen status  
display. Digital channels may already be named if the  
broadcaster sends the information.  
Figure 6. Channel menu  
Antenna (Channel Menu)  
Select either 1 (ANT 1 MAIN) or 2 (ANT 2 AUX) as the  
antenna source for the channels you wish to edit.  
1. Press a number key repeatedly to cycle through the  
characters associated with the key. You can also use  
to change a highlighted character.  
Channel (Channel Menu)  
Select the affected channel number (shown in the  
Channel box) in any of three ways:  
2. Press ENTER to set the letter and move to the next letter  
position. Press CANCEL to move back one position.  
Note: When the TV Guide On Screen system is enabled,  
the name displayed is the name provided by TV  
Guide On Screen instead of the name you assign.  
Press CH  
/
to select from channels already in  
memory. If you also wish to tune to the channel, press  
ENTER  
.
Signal Strength (Channel Menu)  
Highlight the channel box and press  
through all channel numbers, one at a time. If you  
also wish to tune to the channel, press ENTER  
to move  
Displays the approximate signal strength of the currently  
tuned digital channel. Use this indicator to help you adjust  
the antenna direction for best signal reception. The taller  
the bar, the stronger the signal. This indicator applies only  
to digital channels.  
.
Highlight the channel box, enter the number directly,  
and press ENTER. Note that with this method, you must  
press ENTER for the screen to display settings for the  
selected channel.  
To view the effects of antenna adjustments on digital  
channels, tune to the digital channel you wish to measure  
while remaining in this menu. To tune to a channel, either:  
Channel numbers can be one part, analog or digital (up  
to five digits long), or two part for digital channels. For a  
two-part digital channel, press  
on the remote to  
CANCEL  
Highlight the channel box, press CH  
display the desired channel number, and press ENTER  
Enter the channel number on the remote control and  
/
or  
to  
.
enter a separator after the first, second, or third number,  
depending on the broadcaster’s channel information.  
For digital channels, when the broadcaster has sent a  
virtual channel number, the virtual channel number is  
shown in the text box and the original physical digital  
channel is shown below on screen as a reference. One  
original channel number can be associated with several  
different virtual channels.  
press ENTER  
.
Terminology  
Virtual Channel Number  
A channel number used by a local broadcaster to help  
you identify their digital channel. Usually this is associ-  
ated with their traditional analog channel number. For  
example, a broadcaster may associate digital channel  
2-1 with analog channel 2.  
Memory (Channel Menu)  
After the available channels have been memorized with  
Memorize Channels on the Setup menu, you can add  
weaker channels or delete unwanted channels using this  
option. For example, if you wish to see only digital chan-  
nels listed, use this menu to delete analog channels from  
memory.  
Physical Digital Channel Number  
The channel number officially assigned to the actual  
broadcast frequency.  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
65  
Channel Menu, continued  
FAV (Channel Menu)  
Once you have added a channel to FAV memory, FAV  
and the memory bank number appear under the tuned  
channel number on the TV screen. You can access the  
FAV feature through the Channel menu or you can bypass  
the menu and use only the remote control.  
The FAV feature lets you store groups of favorite channels  
in up to nine different FAV memory banks. For example,  
each household member can store favorite channels in  
their own bank or you can store groups of channels by  
content, e.g., news, sports, children’s programming, etc.  
You can store the same channel in multiple FAV banks.  
FAV Setup Using the Channel Menu  
Initial Setup of a FAV Bank and  
Adding FAV Channels Using the  
Menu  
1. With the Channel menu displayed, select a channel using one of the  
methods described on the preceding page, for example, press CH  
for a memorized channel.  
/
2. Highlight the desired bank (FAV1FAV9) and press ENTER to check mark the  
selected FAV memory bank. The channel number displayed has now been  
added to the checked FAV bank.  
3. With the FAV bank still highlighted, press CH  
/
to display the next  
channel you wish to add to the FAV bank.  
4. Press ENTER to add a check mark next to the highlighted FAV bank.  
5. Repeat steps 2–4 for additional channels and FAV banks.  
Removing FAV Channels Using the 1. With the Channel menu displayed, press CH  
/
to display the memo-  
Menu  
rized channel you wish to remove.  
2. Highlight the desired FAV memory bank (FAV1FAV9).  
3. Press ENTER to remove the check mark.  
Using FAV Channels  
Viewing FAV Banks  
1. Press the FAV key. Wait for the TV to tune to a channel in the current FAV bank.  
2. Press th FAV key repeatedly to cycle through the channels available in the  
e
current FAV bank.  
Changing FAV Banks  
1. Press the FAV key. Wait for the TV to tune to a channel in the current FAV bank.  
2. When tuning is complete and while the TV status display is still visible on  
screen, press the number key for the desired bank.  
Note: Wait for the channel change to finish before pressing the number key.  
Otherwise, the TV may ignore the FAV number.  
If No FAV Banks Are Set Up  
The FAV key switches to the previously tuned channel; works like the QV key.  
FAV Setup Using Only the Remote Control  
Adding FAV Channels  
1. While watching TV, tune to the channel you want to add to the current FAV  
memory bank. See the instructions above if you need to first change to a  
different FAV bank.  
2. Press and hold the FAV button for about 2 seconds. When FAV and the  
memory bank number appear under the channel number, the channel has  
been successfully added.  
Removing FAV Channels  
1. While watching TV, press the FAV button  
This procedure removes the channel 2. While the TV status display is still visible on screen, press the number key  
only from the selected bank and  
leaves the other banks unchanged.  
for the memory bank.  
2. Press the FAV button repeatedly until you see the desired channel.  
3. While the channel number and FAV indicator (with correct bank number)  
are still displayed on the screen, press CANCEL. You must press CANCEL  
before the indicator disappears. When the FAV indicator disappears, the  
channel has been successfully removed.  
66  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Digital Captions  
The following display options are available for digital  
sources:  
Captions Menu  
For analog channels, broadcasters can send either stan-  
dard closed captions or text service. Standard closed  
captions follow the dialogue of the characters on screen  
and display in a small section of the screen. Text-service  
closed captions often contain information such as weather  
or news and cover a large portion of the screen.  
Captions 1–6: Sent by broadcaster.  
On if Mute: Closed captions are displayed when  
audio is muted. When selected, press MUTE on the TV  
remote control to turn captioning on/off (Caption 1).  
For digital channels, broadcasters can send up to six dif-  
ferent captioning selections or can send analog captions  
that are the same as those sent by the analog station.  
Each TV station may broadcast only one or two types of  
captions or none at all. The TV cannot decode closed  
captions received on component or HDMI inputs.  
Off: No closed captions.  
Note: For digital programs, if the broadcaster is  
sending only analog captions converted to digital  
format, then the analog caption settings apply.  
Appearance  
The closed-captions provider selects the default options  
when sending digital closed captions. Select Custom to  
override defaults and customize the appearance of closed  
captions. These settings do not apply to analog closed  
captioning converted to digital.  
Digital Settings  
The Digital Settings menu allows you to customize the  
appearance of the closed captions sent by the broad-  
caster. Digital settings do not apply to analog closed cap-  
tions converted to digital.  
Figure 7. Captions menu  
To open the Digital Settings menu, select Custom for the  
Appearance option. Move the highlight to the Digital  
Settings icon and press ENTER  
.
Analog Captions  
The TV can display one of the following captions for  
analog sources:  
CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4: standard closed-caption  
signals  
Text1, Text2, Text3, or Text4: Text-service signals  
On if mute: Closed captions appear when audio is  
muted. When selected, press MUTE on the TV remote  
control to turn on/off the standard closed-caption  
signal CC1.  
Off: No closed captions.  
Figure 8. Closed Captions, Digital Settings sub-menu  
Font  
Background  
The available font options are as follows:  
To make the analog closed captions easier to read, you  
can choose to display the background color as either  
black or gray behind the text.  
Default: Selected by the closed-captions pro-  
vider  
Font 1: Monospaced font with serifs  
Font 2: Proportionally spaced font with serifs  
Font 3: Monospaced font without serifs  
Font 4: Proportionally spaced without serifs  
Font 5: Casual font  
IMPORTANT  
When analog text closed captioning is  
selected, a large black or gray box appears  
on your TV screen if no signal is broadcast.  
Font 6: Cursive font  
Font 7: Small capitals  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
67  
Opacity (Font)  
You can customize the visibility of your fonts using the fol-  
Captions Menu, continued  
lowing settings:  
Size  
Translucent: TV program is dimmed behind the text  
Select the desired font size. Large is the recommended  
font size.  
Transparent: Invisible text reveals the TV program  
behind.  
Color  
Opaque: Solid text blocks view of the TV program  
The available font colors are listed below. Text and back-  
ground cannot be set to the same color.  
Flashing: Text flashes at intervals  
Background Opacity  
You can customize the background for digital captions  
using the following settings:  
White  
Black  
Magenta  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Cyan  
Blue  
Translucent: TV program is dimmed behind the  
background  
Background  
Transparent: No visible background  
You can change the background color to make the digital  
closed captions easier to read. The available background  
colors are listed below. Text and background cannot be  
set to the same color.  
Opaque: Solid background covers TV program  
Flashing: Background flashes at intervals  
White  
Black  
Magenta  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Cyan  
Blue  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
Mitsubishi recommends you use contrasting  
colors for captions and background.  
Black translucent background combined  
with a white font makes an easy-to-read  
combination.  
The content of captions is determined by the  
broadcaster. If your captions show strange  
characters, misspellings, or odd grammar, it is  
not a malfunction of the TV.  
Use care when selecting custom colors. Your  
choice may affect the readability of captions.  
68  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Lock TV by Time and Front-Panel Lock  
Parental Lock Menu  
The Parental Lock menu gives you control over three dif-  
ferent types of parental controls. You must use a pass  
code to open this menu to enable/disable the lock options.  
The three parental controls available are:  
Lock by Time (Parental Lock Menu)  
Lock by Time allows you to block all use of the TV during  
specified hours. During the lock time, you must use your  
pass code to view the TV. To lock the TV by time:  
Ratings (U.S. Ratings/Other Ratings)  
1. Press  
to select On or Off for Lock by Time.  
V-Chip technology lets you restrict access to  
programming based on program-rating signals sent by  
the broadcaster. For U.S. ratings, you can also set the  
time of day for these restrictions to be in effect.  
2. Press to move to the Lock Time box.  
a. With the hour number highlighted in yellow, press  
repeatedly to change the hour and associ-  
ated AM/PM indicator. You can also just press  
and hold to change the hour.  
Lock by Time  
Lets you restrict TV use by time of day.  
b. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the minutes.  
Front Panel Lock  
Lets you disable the controls on the front of the TV.  
Use this option if there are small children near the TV  
who may be tempted to press the buttons.  
c. With the minutes number highlighted in yellow,  
press  
repeatedly to change the minutes.  
Just press and hold to move quickly through the  
numbers.  
d. Press to move to the Unlock Time and set the  
time as described above.  
NOTE: To make Lock by Time active 24 hours a day, set  
Lock and Unlock to the same time.  
Front Panel Lock (Parental Lock Menu)  
Front Panel Lock lets you disable controls on the front  
panel to prevent inadvertent changes to TV settings.  
Select On to disable the buttons and select Off to restore  
their operation.  
To release the front button lock without using the remote  
control:  
Access to  
Ratings Menus  
Lock TV by  
Time  
TV Front Panel  
Lock On/Off  
When Energy Mode is set to Fast Power On, press  
and hold the MENU button on the front panel for over  
eight seconds. If the TV is on, a message will display  
confirming release of the Front Panel Lock.  
Figure 9. Parental Lock menu  
Setting a Pass Code  
You are prompted to enter a pass code whenever you  
select Parental Lock on the Main menu. To set a pass  
code for the first time:  
When Energy Mode is set to Low Power, press POWER  
on the front panel to turn on the TV. Press and hold the  
MENU button on the front panel for over eight seconds.  
1. Press MENU, highlight Parental Lock, then press ENTER  
.
Rating Menus  
A screen prompting you for a pass code will display.  
The rating menus allow you to:  
2. Input a four-digit pass code using the number keys on  
the remote control.  
Turn rating restrictions on or off  
Change the permitted rating level  
Press CANCEL to delete a number and move  
back one space.  
Set the time of day to enforce rating restrictions (U.S.  
ratings only)  
Press MENU or EXIT to close the menu without  
setting a pass code.  
The TV comes from the factory with pre-set U.S. V-Chip  
ratings and with the rating locks turned off. The pre-set  
ratings are TV rating TV-PG and movie rating PG. If you  
turn on V-Chip blocking, these presets allow only pro-  
grams rated TV-PG/PG or lower until you change the  
rating level.  
3. Press ENTER to set the pass code just input.  
To reset the pass code, see the procedure in Appendix A.  
After changing the channel or device, there may be a delay  
of up to five seconds before the rating restrictions take  
effect.  
IMPORTANT  
If you forget your four-digit pass code, see  
Appendix A.  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
69  
8. To set the time of day for these restrictions to be in  
Parental Lock Menu, continued  
effect, press to move to the Start box. To make the  
rating restrictions active twenty-four hours a day, set  
Start and Stop to the same time. To set the time:  
U.S. Ratings Menu  
Use this menu to turn U.S. rating restrictions on or off and  
to change the permitted rating levels.  
a. With the hour number highlighted in yellow, press  
repeatedly to change the hour. You can also  
just press and hold to change the hour.  
TV Content  
Categories  
b. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the  
minutes.  
c. With the minutes number highlighted in yellow,  
press  
repeatedly to change the minutes.  
Just press and hold to move quickly through the  
numbers.  
d. Repeat these steps for the Stop time.  
9. Press MENU to return to the Parental Lock menu or  
press EXIT to close all menus.  
Other Ratings Menu  
This TV can recognize new rating systems that may come  
into effect in the future. The Other Ratings menu allows  
you to block digital programming based on such alternate  
rating systems. The alternate rating systems will apply to  
digital broadcast programming only.  
U.S. Restric-  
tions On/Off  
TV Rating and  
Supplemental  
Restrictions  
Restriction  
Hours  
Movie Rating  
Figure 10. U.S. Ratings menu  
Note: The Other Ratings button remains inaccessible  
until the TV receives signals for an alternate rating  
system.  
1. Highlight the U.S. Ratings icon  
on the Parental  
Lock menu (see figure 9) and press ENTER to open the  
U.S. Ratings menu (see figure 10).  
The first time you tune to a channel broadcasting an alter-  
nate rating system, the TV defaults to the most restrictive  
setting. Use this menu to change the allowed rating if you  
are unable to watch a program broadcast with an alternate  
system.  
2. Press  
to select On or Off.  
3. If you selected On, press to move to the TV Rating  
box.  
4. Press  
allow.  
to select the TV rating level you want to  
5. Press to move to the TV content categories. This  
section allows you to specify content blocking in addi-  
tion to that blocked by the TV rating. See the section  
on V-Chip ratings for an explanation of TV content  
categories.  
Press  
to move the highlight among the  
categories.  
Press ENTER to add or remove a check mark for  
each TV content category you want to block or  
unblock.  
6. Press to move to the Programs Not Rated box.  
Press ENTER to add or remove a check mark for block-  
ing or allowing programs that are not rated.  
Figure 11. The Other Ratings menu is available only if the  
TV receives broadcast signals carrying an alternate rating  
system.  
Note: Use care when choosing to block unrated pro-  
gramming. News programs and emergency bul-  
letins carry the “None” or “NR” (Not Rated) V-Chip  
signal, and they are blocked with this option ac-  
tive.  
IMPORTANT  
New rating systems recognizable by the TV  
may be new U.S.-based systems not included  
in the original V-Chip rating system. The use  
of “Canadian” in the sample screen is just  
one possibility.  
7. Press to move to the Movie Rating box. Press  
to select the movie rating level you want to allow.  
Detailed information on rating guidelines follows this  
discussion of the Parental Lock menu.  
70  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Parental Lock Menu, continued  
1. Highlight the button labelled Other Ratings on the  
Parental Lock menu (see figure 9) and press ENTER to  
open the Other Ratings menu (see figure 11).  
mark, press ENTER to remove the check mark and allow  
programs with this rating.  
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each additional rating  
system you would like to set up.  
2. Press  
to select On or Off.  
3. If you selected On, press to move to the Rating  
9. Press MENU to return to the Parental Lock menu or  
Group box.  
press EXIT to close all menus.  
Note that you can change settings only for the rating  
system available on the currently tuned channel. In  
the figure above, for example, the Canadian rating  
system is in effect. To change settings at a later time  
for the Canadian rating system, you must again tune to  
a channel broadcasting the Canadian system.  
Bypassing the Ratings Lock and Lock by  
Time  
If you try to watch blocked programming, a notice appears  
prompting you for a pass code. To use the TV:  
Input your four-digit pass code and press ENTER.  
4. Press  
to select from the subgroups available for  
Change to a channel airing an allowed program or  
change to another device.  
the rating system—English or French in this example.  
5. Press to move to the Rating box.  
If you try to use the TV when it is locked by time, a similar  
screen appears, prompting you for your pass code.  
6. Press  
to block.  
to select the program rating level you want  
To reactivate the rating lock or TV Lock by Time after  
using the pass code, power the TV off and then on.  
7. Press ENTER to add a check mark to indicate blocking is  
in effect for the rating. When a rating shows a check  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
71  
V-Chip Signal Information  
V-CHIP EXCEPTIONS  
When provided by the broadcaster or program source,  
V-Chip ratings let you control the types of programming  
that can be viewed on the TV. When V-Chip ratings are  
supplied, they are displayed when you change the channel  
or press INFO on the remote control.  
V-Chip blocking is ineffective for programs viewed  
on devices connected to component or HDMI  
inputs. Many of these devices, however, have their  
own parental-control systems.  
Videotapes, laser discs, and DVDs may not  
contain V-Chip rating signals. V-Chip cannot  
block playback of recordings without V-Chip rating  
signals.  
TV Ratings  
TV ratings apply to TV programs and made-for-TV movies.  
You can apply supplemental blocking to TV ratings based on  
the TV content categories described below. TV ratings are:  
Broadcasters are not currently required to include  
V-Chip rating signals. V-Chip cannot block pro-  
gramming broadcast without the V-Chip rating  
signal.  
TV-Y  
Youth. For children under the age of 7.  
TV-Y7 Youth 7 and older.  
TV-G  
General Audience. For the entire family to view.  
TV-PG Parental Guidance. Parental Guidance is  
recommended; may not be suitable for some  
children.  
Movie Ratings  
Movie ratings are the MPAA ratings used for theater-  
released and direct-to-video movies. Movie ratings are:  
TV-14  
Adolescent 14 and older. Not recommended for  
children under the age of 14.  
G
General Audience. Designed for the entire family  
to view.  
TV-MA Mature Audience. For adults only.  
PG  
Parental Guidance. Parental Guidance is  
recommended, may not be suitable for some  
children.  
TV Content Categories  
Used in association with the TV ratings above, TV content  
categories allow you to apply supplemental blocking.  
Apply supplemental blocking using the U.S. Ratings menu.  
PG-13 Parental Guidance, 13 and Older. Not  
recommended for children under the age of 13.  
Restricted. Restricted in theaters to 17 years old  
and older unless accompanied by an adult.  
FV Fantasy Violence. Applies to TV-Y7 only.  
R
D
Sexual Dialog. Applies in different degrees to TV-PG  
and TV-14.  
NC-17 No Children 17 or Under. Restricted in theaters  
L
Adult Language. Applies in differing degrees to  
TV-PG, TV-14, and TV-MA.  
to 18 years old and older.  
Adult. Designed for and restricted in theaters to  
adult audiences only.  
X
S
V
Sexual Situations. Applies in differing degrees to  
TV-PG, TV-14, and TV-MA  
Violence (graphic or realistic). Applies in differing  
degrees to TV-PG, TV-14, and TV-MA.  
The movie rating you select is for the least-restrictive  
program level that can be viewed. For example, if you  
select the PG-13 rating, movies rated G, PG and PG-13  
can be watched, but movies rated R, NC-17, and X are  
blocked.  
TV Rating  
FV  
D
L
S
V
TV-Y  
Not Applicable  
Programs Not Rated: This refers to programs that carry  
no rating, such as news, sports, weather, emergency bul-  
letins, or movies prior to or without MPAA ratings. This  
does not include programs without V-Chip signals.  
TV-Y7  
TV-PG  
TV-14  
TV-MA  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not  
Appli-  
cable  
TV content categories. Boxes marked with an “X” indicate  
supplemental blocking you can apply to each rating level.  
The TV rating you select is for the least-restrictive program  
level allowed. For example, if you select TV-PG, programs  
rated TV-Y, TV-Y7, and TV-PG can be viewed, but pro-  
grams rated TV-14 and TV-MA are blocked.  
IMPORTANT  
When you select a TV content category to block, all TV  
programs with the same content category listing are  
blocked. For example, if you select to block V (Violence)  
at the TV-14 level, any programs with the V category listing  
rated TV-PG are also blocked.  
If you enable blocking with the Programs  
Not Rated option, you may block news or  
emergency bulletins carrying the “None” or  
“NR” Not Rated V-Chip rating. Use care when  
blocking programming that is not rated.  
72  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
TV Speakers  
This selection turns the TV’s internal speakers on or off.  
Audio/Video Menu  
Select Off:  
When sending the sound through a separate sound  
system or surround sound A/V receiver.  
If your A/V receiver is under NetCommand control  
Note: To prevent damage from a sudden increase in vol-  
ume, turn the TV volume down low before chang-  
ing this option to On.  
Audio/Video Settings and the Remote Control  
To adjust individual audio or video settings directly with  
the remote control:  
Figure 12. Audio/Video Menu  
1. Press AUDIO or VIDEO repeatedly to cycle through the  
A/V Memory Reset  
A/V Memory Reset allows you to reset a specific input’s  
A/V settings to the original factory settings. Highlight the  
available settings.  
2. Press  
to adjust the setting. The setting display  
will disappear after five seconds of inactivity.  
box and press  
to select the input name. Next press  
ENTER  
.
Audio Settings  
The audio settings of Balance, Listen to, and Language  
are general TV settings unaffected by A/V Memory Reset.  
Analog and Digital Audio Settings  
Enter the audio adjustment mode using either the Audio/  
To reset all A/V settings at once, including the three  
general settings, perform an A/V Reset by pressing the  
front-panel buttons GUIDE and FORMAT simultaneously.  
Video menu or the AUDIO key. Use  
to change settings.  
Some adjustable settings display a slider and correspond-  
ing numeric value on screen. Values can be adjusted from  
0 to 63, with 31 as the midpoint.  
Settings (Audio and Video)  
Each input or device has its own A/V memory. Press  
to select the input or device in the A/V Memory Reset  
box, then select Audio or Video to adjust individual  
settings. Press ENTER to close the menu and display the  
individual settings.  
Note: The effects of the audio settings of Bass, Treble,  
Balance, and Surround affect only the sound  
heard through the TV speakers.  
Bass  
Enhances or reduces low-pitched sound.  
Use  
to cycle through the individual settings. Use  
to change the setting values. Press EXIT to return to  
normal TV viewing. For descriptions of the individual A/V  
settings, see the following pages.  
Treble  
Enhances or reduces high-pitched sound.  
Balance  
Adjusts the level of sound between the left and right  
TV speakers.  
Video Mute  
The default is On, which displays a blue background when  
no signal is being received on the INPUT COMPO-  
NENT, or HDMI jacks.  
Surround  
,
Creates simulated stereo and surround effects through  
the TV speakers. Your choices are:  
Off: No surround effects (default).  
Film Mode (480i signals only)  
Simulated Stereo: The TV creates a simu-  
lated stereo effect when watching a non-stereo  
program.  
Auto is the default setting. With Auto selected, the TV  
automatically detects and applies film-decoding correc-  
tion for images that originated on 24-frame-per-second film  
cameras and were converted to 30-frame-per-second video  
for broadcast (3:2 pulldown conversion). Try the Off setting  
if the TV adds noticeable jagged edges to the images.  
Surround Sound: The TV creates a simulated  
surround effect when watching a stereo program.  
Level Sound  
When the original video was filmed on 30-frame-per-sec-  
ond cameras, the Auto setting automatically applies video  
decoding, the same as used with the Off setting.  
When on, automatically equalizes the volume level  
when there are significant sound-level differences  
between program segments, such as between regular  
programming and commercials.  
Film Mode is not effective for high-definition signals.  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Digital-Only Audio Settings  
You can set digital-only audio settings while viewing either  
analog or digital sources, but the settings affect only  
broadcast digital content.  
73  
Audio/Video Menu, continued  
To receive the best fidelity with music programs,  
change this setting to Off.  
When connecting to an A/V receiver, set Level  
Sound to Off and turn off the TV speakers to send  
full dynamics to the A/V receiver.  
Language  
Determines what possible language you can hear.  
Analog-Only Audio Settings  
You can set analog-only audio settings while viewing  
either analog or digital sources, but the settings affect  
only broadcast analog content.  
The Language option is available for ANT 1  
and IEEE 1394 devices but not for devices connected  
to the INPUT COMPONENT, and HDMI jacks.  
Language choices are:  
/ANT 2  
,
English  
French  
German  
Italian  
Portuguese  
Spanish  
Other  
Listen To  
Determines how your TV receives a broadcast audio  
signal and plays the sound you hear.  
Your choices are:  
Stereo: Default setting. The TV plays stereo  
broadcasts in stereo and mono broadcasts in  
mono. The word Stereo is displayed when you  
tune to a channel broadcasting in stereo.  
IEEE 1394 Amplifier Settings  
Available settings for some MPEG2 amplifiers are:  
Balance  
Adjusts the level of sound between the left and right  
speakers. The slider range is 0–254, with 127 as the  
midpoint.  
SAP (Second Audio Program): Additional monau-  
ral sound track that you cannot hear during normal  
TV viewing. The SAP signal might be related to  
the program you are watching, (such as a sound  
track in a foreign language), or it might be unre-  
lated (such as a weather report). If an SAP signal  
is broadcast, the letters SAP are displayed when  
you tune to the channel.  
Loudness  
When on, makes the audio level more uniform.  
Preset  
Select the mode that matches the audio source. Your  
choices are:  
Mono: Reduces background noise. Use when  
receiving a weak stereo audio signal. All audio is  
played mono with this setting.  
Off  
Jazz  
Rock  
Classical Music  
Movie  
Speech  
Listen To is not available for 1394 devices or devices con-  
nected to the INPUT, COMPONENT and HDMI jacks.  
Equalizer  
Equalizes the sound.  
74  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
Audio/Video Menu, continued  
Video Settings  
Enter the video adjustment mode using either the Audio/  
Video menu or the VIDEO key. Press the VIDEO key repeatedly  
to cycle through the video options to the one you want to  
Select the PerfectColor option and press ENTER to  
open the adjustment screen.  
Individual sliders for each color are displayed. Press  
to move from one color to the next. Highlighted  
text shows which slider you are adjusting. Press  
to change settings. Press CANCEL while in the  
PerfectColor screen to reset all colors to the default  
settings.  
change. Use  
to change settings.  
Note: A slider displays on screen for some settings.  
When the slider is displayed, it represents numeric  
values, with 63 as the maximum, 31 as the mid-  
point, and 0 as the minimum.  
Picture Mode: Set the Picture Mode first before  
adjusting other settings, as each Picture Mode stores  
its own values for Contrast, Brightness, and Color  
Temperature. Picture Modes allow you to optimize the  
image for different lighting conditions. The Picture  
Modes are:  
Name of affected input  
PerfectColor Adjust Mode  
Bright: Suited for most daytime viewing.  
Natural: Suited for most nighttime viewing.  
Brilliant: The default setting. For use under  
strong light.  
Contrast (Bright/Natural/Brilliant): Provides a slider to  
adjust the white-to-black level. Low contrast shows a  
variety of shades in darker images, while high contrast  
shows darker images more uniformly black and makes  
colors appear more vibrant. In most home lighting  
situations, a medium contrast looks best. High con-  
trast is good for brightly lit environments.  
Figure 13. Set PerfectColor adjustments independently  
for each TV input.  
PerfecTint™: Provides further color refinement using  
six color sliders memorized for each input. To use  
PerfecTint:  
1. With the PerfectColor screen displayed and with  
Adjust Mode highlighted in yellow characters,  
press to open the PerfecTint screen.  
Brightness (Bright/Natural/Brilliant): Provides a slider  
to adjust the overall brightness of the picture.  
Color: Provides a slider to adjust color intensity.  
2. Press  
to move from one color to the next.  
to change settings. Press CANCEL to  
Press  
Tint: Provides a slider to adjust the red-to-green ratio.  
reset to the default settings.  
3. To return to PerfectColor, highlight Adjust Mode  
in yellow characters and press  
Sharpness: Provides a slider to adjust the detail and  
clarity.  
.
Color Temperature (Bright/Natural/Brilliant): Allows  
you to adjust how white is displayed.  
Low: White images have a warm cast. This  
adjustment is an average and can vary due to  
ambient room lighting, video scene brightness,  
and the TV’s age. Natural/Color Temp at the  
low setting displays video at the 6500K industry  
standard for NTSC pictures.  
Name of affected input  
PerfecTint Adjust Mode  
High: White images have a cool cast. This setting  
may provide the most realistic picture under bright  
lighting.  
PerfectColor™: Lets you adjust the intensity of any  
or all of six colors (Magenta, Red, Yellow, Green, Cyan  
and Blue) to create color balance for the current image  
source. PerfectColor settings are memorized for each  
TV input or device.  
Figure 14. PerfecTint adjustments for each TV input let  
you further refine color adjustments..  
Video Noise: Reduces minor noise (graininess) in  
the picture. Use the Low setting with good-quality  
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings  
75  
Audio/Video Menu, continued  
PerfectColor™. The adjustment screen displays  
without the vertical color bars when used for a com-  
puter image.  
signals. Use High with poor-quality signals. Turn off  
to leave the picture unaltered.  
DeepField™ Imager: When On is selected, the  
black levels are dynamically enhanced in portions of  
the screen to provide strong contrast with detail over  
mixed screen content. When Off is selected, the  
entire screen adjusts the contrast the same. When  
Demo is selected, a split screen picture appears and  
you can see how the picture will look when DeepField  
Imager is on (right side) or when it is off (left side).  
PerfecTint™. The adjustment screen displays  
without the vertical color bars when used for a com-  
puter image.  
Auto Position: Press ENTER to automatically center the  
position of the PC video.  
HorizPosition (Horizontal Position): Manually adjust  
the horizontal position of PC video. This selection  
overrides the Auto Position selection.  
SharpEdge™: When On is selected, special edge  
sharpness enhancements are applied to the vertical  
edges of images.  
VertPosition (Vertical Position): Manually adjust the  
vertical position of PC video. This selection overrides  
the Auto Position selection.  
Personal Computer Video Settings  
Video settings available for images from a personal com-  
puter are:  
Fine Detail: Manually adjust the picture quality of PC  
video, analog signals only. This selection overrides  
the Auto Position selection.  
Contrast  
Brightness  
6
NetCommand Functions  
NetCommand-Controlled Devices and the Input Selection Menu . . 78  
NetCommand-Controlled Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Using IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
78  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
The Remote Control and NetCommand  
NetCommand-Controlled Devices  
and the Input Selection Menu  
Point the TV’s remote control at the TV when operat-  
ing NetCommand-controlled devices. See the chart in  
chapter 3, “TV Setup,” to review device functions you can  
“learn” for the device. Further information on some func-  
tions is included here.  
For devices under NetCommand control, the Input Selec-  
tion menu allows you to:  
Select the device for viewing  
Switch audio between the TV speakers and A/V  
receiver  
The Input Selection Menu and NetCommand  
Power compatible devices on or off  
Verify the destination of signals.  
Power Devices On/Off  
First “learn” the power key(s) for the device. Press INPUT  
to display the Input Selection menu. If you press POWER  
without first displaying the Input Selection menu, the TV  
will turn off.  
Connection  
Section  
Input  
Section  
Audio  
Section  
Devices with separate ON and OFF remote control  
keys. These devices power on automatically when  
you select the device in the Input Selection menu and  
will power off when you turn off the TV.  
Devices that do not power on or off automatically.  
To power on: Highlight the device icon in the Input  
Selection menu and press POWER. Press ENTER to select  
the device.  
To power off: Press INPUT to open the Input Selection  
menu and highlight the device icon. Press POWER on  
the TV’s remote control.  
A/V receiver. Open the Input Selection menu and  
press AUDIO to move navigation to the Audio section.  
Highlight the A/V receiver icon and press POWER on the  
TV’s remote control.  
Figure 1. The Input selection menu for a NetCommand-  
controlled device.  
Input Section  
Additional Functions  
Press  
to highlight an input icon and press ENTER  
to select the input to view and hear. “Learned” inputs on a  
compatible A/V receiver are automatically changed at the  
same time.  
1. Close Split Screen, if active.  
2. Highlight the device icon in the Input Selection menu  
and press ENTER to select the device.  
3. Re-open the Input Selection menu and press the  
“learned” key indicated in the table below.  
Connection Section  
The Connection section shows if there is a recording in  
progress and the device that is recording from the source.  
For example, if the Digital VCR (D-VCR) is currently record-  
ing from ANT 1, when you move the highlight to the Ant-1  
icon, the D-VCR icon appears in the Connection Section.  
This icon disappears when you move the highlight to  
another icon or press CANCEL to stop recording.  
“Learned” Key for the Device Action  
MENU  
Press MENU to open the  
device’s menu. Use  
to navigate the menu.  
GUIDE (“Learned” to change Press GUIDE repeatedly to  
VCR inputs)  
cycle through the VCR’s  
inputs.  
Audio Section  
A NetCommand-controlled A/V receiver connected to the  
TV appears as an AVR icon in the Audio section. Press  
AUDIO to change navigation to the Audio section. Then  
press  
to select either the TV speakers icon or the A/V  
receiver icon. Press ENTER to change the audio selection or  
press INPUT to return navigation to the Input section.  
IMPORTANT  
If a device does not respond to separate ON  
or OFF signals from the remote control, the  
manufacturer has not provided that capabil-  
ity for the device.  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
79  
b. With the minutes highlighted, press  
select the minutes.  
to  
NetCommand-Controlled Recording  
Day. Use  
to select a day of the week.  
This section describes making recordings independently  
of the TV Guide On Screen system. For instructions on  
setting up recordings using TV Guide On Screen, see the  
separate TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide  
User’s Manual.  
5. Select Add and press ENTER to add the recording to  
the Record List. A confirmation message will be  
displayed if your selection is successful. If you pick  
overlapping times, day(s), or destination devices, you  
will see a message stating there is a conflict.  
Recording from the Recording Setup Menu  
6. While the Recording Setup menu is displayed, press  
GUIDE to display the Record List (see figure 3). In the  
Record List you can view a list of scheduled record-  
ings and verify the addition of the recording to the  
schedule. A maximum of 32 recordings can be  
scheduled.  
You can schedule the recording to take place at a later  
time and program the recording duration for a minimum  
of 30 minutes and a maximum of six hours (in 30-minute  
increments). The default is one hour. During the record-  
ing, you can view a different device or power off the TV.  
7. From the Record List you can:  
Immediate Recording from the Menu  
Press CANCEL to delete a recording from the schedule.  
Press GUIDE to return to the Recording Setup menu.  
Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.  
1. Press  
(RECORD) to open the Recording Setup menu.  
Press MENU to return to the Main menu.  
Figure 2. The Recording Setup menu  
2. Review the recording setup information. Move the  
highlight to each box you need to change.  
With the leftmost icon highlighted (the source),  
press to change the source input if needed.  
Channel. If the source is an antenna, select a  
memorized channel using , or enter  
the channel number from the remote control and  
,
CH  
/
press ENTER  
.
Record To. If you have more than one recordable  
Figure 3. Record List screen. From the Record menu,  
press GUIDE to open the Record List to review or cancel  
scheduled recordings.  
device connected, use  
to select it from the  
list in the Record To box.  
Duration. Use  
to select a recording duration  
of from 30 minutes to six hours in 30-minute incre-  
ments. The default is one hour.  
TV Guide On Screen® and the Record List  
Programs scheduled through TV Guide On Screen do not  
appear in the Record List. Refer to the separate TV Guide  
On Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual  
for information regarding scheduling recordings with TV  
Guide On Screen.  
3. Press  
a second time to start recording.  
Time-Delayed Recording from the Menu  
1. Ensure that TV Energy Mode is set to Fast Power On  
and the TV clock is set to the correct time and day.  
Use the Setup menu to make changes.  
If there is a conflict between a recording scheduled  
through TV Guide On Screen and the Record List, the TV  
Guide On Screen recording takes priority.  
2. Press  
(RECORD) to open the Recording Setup menu.  
3. Review the recording setup information. To change  
the source, recording device, or duration, follow the  
steps described above under “Recording Now.”  
Recording from the ChannelView™ Channel  
Guide  
ChannelView™ is available when TV Guide On Screen is  
disabled. ChannelView provides program listings, as sent  
by the broadcasters, for memorized channels on ANT 1  
and ANT 2. Press the GUIDE key while watching ANT 1 or  
ANT 2 to view ChannelView listings and to set up imme-  
diate or future recordings as described here.  
4. Specify when to start the recording.  
Start Time  
a. With the hour highlighted in gold characters,  
press  
to select the hour, including AM or  
PM. Press ENTER to move the highlight to the  
minutes.  
80  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
2. Press GUIDE to open the Record List (figure 2) and view  
NetCommand-Controlled  
Recording, continued  
all scheduled recordings. Press CH  
/
to page  
quickly through the list.  
3. Verify that the program you wish to record appears in  
the list.  
Immediate Recording from ChannelView  
1. Press INPUT to open the Input Selection menu. High-  
4. Press EXIT to close the menu.  
light an ANT 1 or ANT 2 program source and press  
ENTER  
.
Cancelling Recordings  
2. Press GUIDE to open the ChannelView channel guide for  
the current antenna input.  
To Cancel a Recording in Progress  
3. Use  
wish to record from the list of channels.  
4. Press RECORD). The TV will tune to the channel if  
needed.  
to highlight the channel and program you  
1. Press INPUT to open the Input Selection menu.  
2. Move the highlight to the source input icon. There is  
(
no need to press ENTER  
.
The Input Selection menu displays an icon for an  
active recording connection. See the connection icon  
in figure 5.  
A red “R” temporarily displays next to the program  
listing to indicate the program will be recorded.  
5. Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.  
3. Press CANCEL. The connection icon will disappear to  
indicate termination of the recording connection.  
4. Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.  
Connection  
Icon  
Figure 4. A red “R” appears briefly in the ChannelView  
screen to indicate a scheduled recording.  
Time-Delayed Recording from ChannelView  
Set Up the Recording  
1. Ensure that TV Energy Mode is set to Fast Power On  
and the TV clock is set to the correct time and day.  
See “Setup Menu” in chapter 3, “TV Setup.”  
Figure 5. The Input Selection menu displays a connection  
icon for the destination device of a recording in progress.  
To Cancel a Scheduled Recording  
2. Perform steps 1 and 2 described above.  
1. Press  
(RECORD) to open the Record menu.  
3
Press  
to highlight the source channel from which  
you wish to record.  
2. Press GUIDE to open the Record List (figure 2) and view  
all scheduled recordings. Press CH  
quickly through the list.  
/
to page  
4. Press to view a list of future programs on that  
channel.  
3. Highlight the program you wish to remove from the  
5. Press  
6. Press  
to highlight a future program.  
Record List and press CANCEL  
.
(
RECORD).  
4. Press EXIT to close the menu.  
A red “R” temporarily displays next to the program  
listing to indicate the program will be recorded.  
You can schedule a maximum of 32 recordings.  
7. Press EXIT to close the menu.  
Confirm the Recording Setup  
1. Press  
(RECORD) to open the Record menu.  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
Analog Recordings  
When you record a 16:9 digital channel to an analog VCR  
or recording device, there is a mismatch between the 16:9  
ratio of the picture shape from the source and the nar-  
rower 4:3 ratio of the analog recorder.  
81  
NetCommand-Controlled  
Recording, continued  
Record Menu: Setting Recording Defaults  
The Record menu allows you to set defaults for your  
recording devices, set up recordings, view the Record List,  
and cancel scheduled recordings. Highlight the Record  
icon on the Main menu and press ENTER to view the Record  
menu.  
For anamorphic playback on this widescreen TV,  
choose the anamorphic picture display and ensure  
that the TV screen format is set to standard (see the  
section on TV formats in this Owner’s Guide).  
For cropped playback on an older style 4:3 TV, choose  
the cropped display to remove the top and bottom  
sections. This setting does not affect recording from  
analog devices, analog channels, or 4:3 digital chan-  
nels.  
Copy-Protected Material  
When attempting to record copy-protected material, the  
record functions of the NetCommand and IEEE 1394  
systems may be prevented or stopped. If you have  
a program that was originally tagged Record Once,  
NetCommand will change the tag to Record No More on  
the new recording.  
Figure 6. Record menu  
Record Setup  
Highlight Record Setup and press ENTER to display the  
Recording Setup menu, described earlier.  
VCR Recording  
Record List  
Highlight Record List and press ENTER to display the  
Record List, described earlier in this chapter.  
Setting Up Analog VCR Recordings with TV  
Guide On Screen®  
When setting up a recording using TV Guide On Screen,  
note that:  
Default Digital (Recording) Device  
You must select the desired recording device in the TV  
Guide On Screen Record Options menu.  
If you have more than one digital recording device con-  
nected, this option lets you specify which to use as the  
default. The device specified here is the digital record-  
ing device to use when initiating a recording with the  
If you have both analog and digital recording devices,  
always verify that the analog device is the default  
device before starting an analog recording with the  
(
RECORD) key from within ChannelView™.  
(
RECORD) key.  
This option remains grayed out (unavailable) until you  
connect a digital recording device. After the device is  
detected and named, highlight the box and press  
select the recording device.  
The destination recording device for analog record-  
ings must be the analog device connected to the TV’s  
MONITOR OUT jacks.  
to  
Note that digital programs can be recorded on either  
a digital or analog device. For best playback quality,  
however, record digital programs on a digital recording  
device.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
When setting up analog recordings in TV  
Guide On Screen, set the destination record-  
ing device as the analog device connected  
to the TV’s MONITOR OUT VIDEO/LEFT/  
RIGHT jacks.  
Analog sources can be recorded only to  
analog devices.  
Analog sources cannot be recorded to  
digital devices.  
82  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
NetCommand-Controlled  
Recording, continued  
Restrictions for Traditional VCRs  
with NetCommand- and TV Guide On  
Screen-Controlled Recording  
Direct VCR Recording from an Antenna or  
Cable Source  
When your VCR is the current device,  
(RECORD) on the  
TV’s remote control functions the same as the record  
button on the VCR’s remote control or front panel.  
Your VCR must be connected directly to the  
MONITOR OUT VIDEO and LEFT/RIGHT audio  
outputs.  
To record directly from antenna or cable:  
The VCR must be set manually to “Line Input.”  
Display the Input Selection menu, highlight the VCR  
and press GUIDE to change VCR inputs.  
1. Press INPUT on the TV’s remote to display the Input  
Selection menu. Highlight the traditional VCR  
and press POWER to turn on the VCR. If necessary,  
press GUIDE to select the input the VCR is on, such  
as Antenna input (or line input).  
The TV can select channels on compatible cable  
boxes for recordings when the cable box is under  
NetCommand control. Leave the cable box turned on.  
2. Press ENTER to switch the TV to the VCR.  
If the source device or recording device does not have  
separate power on and off features, then leave that  
device powered on.  
3. Select the correct channel for recording on the  
VCR and then press  
(RECORD) to start record-  
ing. You will need to stop the recording manually  
at the end of the program  
You cannot record from source devices connected to  
the TV COMPONENT inputs or HDMI 1 or  
2
con-  
nections.  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
83  
Switching Between Analog and Digital IEEE  
1394 Outputs  
Using IEEE 1394 Devices  
To enable switching between analog and digital outputs,  
you must have check marked the Analog Connection box  
when the New 1394 Device screen displayed when you  
first connected the device. See chapter 3, “TV Setup.”  
IEEE 1394 Devices and the Input Selection  
Menu  
When you connect an IEEE 1394 device to the TV network  
and power it on, the new device is automatically detected.  
Some non-audio/video or incompatible IEEE 1394 devices,  
such as personal computers (PCs), may not be detected  
by the TV and do not appear in the Input Selection menu.  
Such devices can, however, coexist and are still available  
to work with other devices on the IEEE 1394 network that  
are compatible with these non-audio/video devices.  
Some devices may be a combination of two or more types  
of devices, such as a recording device that is also a tuning  
device. Each portion of the device is called a sub-unit.  
When you select a device on the Input Selection menu  
that has sub-units, a pop-up menu will appear to allow  
you to select the sub-unit you wish to use.  
Recording to IEEE 1394 Devices  
Figure 7. The ClearThought Auto Input sensing screen  
for IEEE 1394 devices. Place a check in the Analog  
Connection box if your device has both analog and digital  
outputs.  
You can use the TV to control recording to IEEE 1394  
devices. The following table lets you see what signals can  
be recorded to an IEEE 1394 digital VCR or A/V disc.  
1. Press INPUT to display the Input Selection menu.  
Recording  
Availability  
2. Highlight the icon for the IEEE 1394 device and press  
Signal Type  
TV Input  
ENTER  
.
Can be  
Digital channels, includ- ANT 1, ANT 2  
3. Press  
to switch between icons representing the  
recorded ing high-definition  
channels  
analog and digital outputs of the device. See figure 8.  
Digital signals, including IEEE 1394 devices  
high-definition signals  
Cannot be Analog channels  
ANT 1, ANT 2  
INPUT 1  
recorded  
Analog signals  
-3,  
COMPONENT  
inputs  
Digital signals  
HDMI 1 and  
2,  
PC-DVI  
Summary of signal inputs and recording to an IEEE 1394  
digital VCR or A/V disc.  
Figure 8. The Input Selection menu shows icons for the  
analog and digital outputs of the IEEE 1394 device.  
4. Press ENTER again to select the device.  
84  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
The TV Remote Control and IEEE 1394  
Devices  
To Power On or Off a Compatible IEEE 1394  
Device  
Usually, compatible IEEE 1394 devices power on when  
selected in the Input Selection menu and power off when  
you turn off the TV. If you need manual control over power  
on/off:  
For satellite receivers and cable boxes, you may  
also be able to use the numbers or other additional  
buttons.  
For an IEEE 1394 cable box or satellite receiver, you  
can also try using the CABLE/SAT position of the TV  
remote control to see if it can operate the device. If  
not, use the remote control that came with the device.  
1. Press INPUT to open the Input Selection menu.  
2. Move the highlight to the icon for the device. There is  
no need to press ENTER  
3. Press POWER  
4. Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.  
.
.
Operation of IEEE 1394 Devices with the TV’s Remote Control  
(slide switch set to TV position)  
Device  
AMPLIFIER  
(some MPEG2  
models only)  
CABLE/SAT  
A/V DISC  
DVCR  
Remote Con-  
trol Key  
Power the device on/off when highlighted in the Input selection menu. See the instructions above.  
POWER  
Index search forward/re-  
Page up/down  
(when track list is displayed)  
Channel up/down  
verse  
CH  
/
(if supported by DVCR)  
Volume Up/Down  
Mute On/Off  
VOL  
/
MUTE  
Search by time  
(when followed by ENTER  
Number functions  
0-9 (DIGITS)  
)
Last Channel Recall  
QV  
Exit menus/displays Exit menus/displays  
Exit menus/displays  
Enter or select  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Enter or select  
Enter or select  
Cancel function or counter  
reset  
Cancel function  
Delete recording from Track List  
CANCEL  
Digital-channel guide  
(may need to press  
twice)  
Display Track List.  
GUIDE  
Skip to beginning or end of  
program  
Up/down in track list  
Skip Backwards 12 seconds  
during playback  
Up/down/left/right  
Up/down/left/right  
Skip Forward 30 seconds  
during playback  
Play  
Play  
PLAY  
STOP  
Stop  
Stop  
Record  
Record  
RECORD  
Reverse picture scan or Slow Play Reverse or Rewind  
REV  
Fast picture scan or Fast Play  
Pause  
Fast Play or Fast Forward  
Pause  
FFWD  
PAUSE  
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions  
85  
The Track List may also display copy status for a track.  
You may see the following status displays:  
A/V Discs  
A/V Disc Track List Screen  
When viewing an A/V Disc:  
Copy Once  
The track can be copied once only.  
Copy No More  
If a retention value is shown, the  
track may be movable using your  
other A/V equipment. Mitsubishi  
TVs do not support this function.  
Press GUIDE to display its Track List (see figure below).  
Press or to navigate through the Track List.  
To play a track, select it on the list, then press ENTER  
Press INFO to view details for a highlighted track, if  
available.  
.
Retention Period  
To move through listings quickly, press PAGE  
To delete a track, highlight it and press CANCEL  
/
.
Some Copy Never tracks have a retention period assigned  
by the content provider. The retention period is the length  
of time you can keep and view the recording. The initial  
retention period, if any, is shown next to the copy status  
in the Track List INFO display. To check how much time  
remains of the retention period, start viewing the recording  
.
and press INFO  
.
Note: The retention period for all tracks on the disc  
expires if there is any loss of power to the TV, even  
momentary. For example, expiration of the reten-  
tion period will occur if you:  
Unplug the TV from the AC power source.  
Experience a power outage or power  
fluctuation.  
Figure 9. A/V Disc Track List screen  
Remember that you can safely turn off TV power  
using the POWER button without affecting the reten-  
tion period.  
A/V Disc Search by Time  
While playing an IEEE 1394 A/V disc you can search to a  
specific time in the recording.  
To Copy a Track to Another IEEE 1394 Device  
1. Press INPUT on the remote control and press  
to select the source A/V disc. Press ENTER to open the  
Track List.  
1. Start playing the desired track on the A/V disc.  
2. Use the number buttons to enter the time code posi-  
tion of hours followed by minutes. For example, to  
enter one hour and twenty-two minutes (1:22) into the  
2. Press or to select a track. Then press ENTER to  
start playback.  
track, enter  
1
,
2
,
2.  
3. Press  
(
(
PAUSE) to pause playback.  
3. Press ENTER to skip to the time code position. To  
4. Press  
RECORD) on the TV remote. The Record  
cancel the request or to start over, press CANCEL  
instead of ENTER  
menu will display.  
.
5. In the Record To section, review the destination  
device (A/V Disc, DVCR). Change if necessary.  
Copying A/V Disc Recordings  
6. Set the duration to the length of the original track or  
longer.  
Tracks you record to disc may have copy restrictions  
assigned to them. To learn a track’s copy status, high-  
light the track in the Track List and press INFO. Tracks are  
assigned one of these ratings:  
7. Press  
a second time to start recording.  
Copy Free  
No copy restrictions apply.  
(or no status shown)  
Copy Never  
The track cannot be transferred to  
another recording device. Tracks  
of this type may have an assigned  
retention period. See below for  
more information.  
7
Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Video Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Connecting a Computer to the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Computer Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
88  
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
Setup  
Video Adjustments  
1. See the TV specifications in Appendix B to confirm  
that your computer video signal is compatible with the  
TV.  
1. Power on the computer if it is not already on.  
2. Select PC from the Input Selection menu. To do this,  
press INPUT to open the Input Selection menu, move the  
highlight to the PC icon, and press ENTER.  
2. Note whether the computer supplies a digital or  
analog video signal. You will need this information  
during the setup procedure.  
3. Change the resolution of the computer image. The  
goal is to maximize the computer resolution while  
maintaining a suitable aspect ratio for the image. See  
the explanation later in this chapter.  
Digital video signal: Comes from the computer’s  
DVI or HDMI output.  
Analog video signal: Comes from the computer’s  
VGA 15-pin output and requires a VGA-to-DVI  
cable or a VGA cable and VGA/DVI adapter.  
4. Perform TV video adjustments. Press VIDEO repeat-  
edly to cycle through the video-adjustment options.  
The following additional adjustments are available for  
computer video:  
3. Power on the TV.  
Auto Position. Press ENTER to automatically center  
the position of the PC video.  
IMPORTANT  
HorizPosition (Horizontal Position). Manually  
adjust the horizontal position of the PC. This  
selection overrides the Auto Position selection.  
In the next step, select the correct video signal  
type (analog or digital) in the NetCommand  
menu. Otherwise, the TV will be unable to  
display a picture from the computer.  
VertPosition (Vertical Position). Manually adjust  
the vertical position of the PC. This selection  
overrides the Auto Position selection.  
4. Press MENU to open the Main menu, highlight the  
Fine Detail (analog DVI-A signals only). Manually  
adjust the picture quality of the PC. This selection  
overrides the Auto Position selection.  
NetCommand icon, and press ENTER  
.
5. Highlight the PC-DVI text box and press to change  
the setting to match your computer’s video signal  
type, either Digital or Analog.  
5. Change the TV picture format to suit the image.  
Press FORMAT to cycle through the available picture  
formats. See the chart later in this chapter showing  
how various computer resolutions are displayed on  
the TV.  
To Remove the Computer Icon from  
the Input Selection Menu  
When you disconnect an analog video connection of a  
personal computer, the computer icon remains in the Input  
Selection menu until you remove it.  
1.  
In the NetCommand menu, highlight the PC DVI Input box.  
Figure 1. Specify your computer’s video signal type  
(analog or digital) in the NetCommand menu.  
2. Highlight the PC DVI Input box and press to select  
Digital.  
6. Press EXIT to close all menus.  
3. Press EXIT to close all menus.  
7. Connect the computer’s video output to the TV’s  
The next time you open the Input Selection menu, the  
computer icon will no longer appear.  
PC-DVI jack. See the connection diagrams in this  
chapter to find the method best suited to your equip-  
ment.  
8. Connect the computer’s audio output using one of  
these options:  
Note  
Connect analog left/right audio to the TV’s  
PC-DVI AUDIO jack.  
The PC-DVI input on the TV can accept either  
analog (DVI-A) or digital (DVI-D) signals.  
If your computer offers digital audio output,  
connect it to a digital A/V receiver instead.  
You must specify the PC DVI Input setting in the  
NetCommand menu as either Analog or Digital,  
depending on the signal type sent by your computer.  
If your computer offers digital audio output, you can  
connect your computer’s digital audio out to a digital  
input on a digital A/V receiver.  
IMPORTANT  
See Appendix B for signal compatibility.  
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
89  
Computer with HDMI Digital Monitor Output  
Required: HDMI-to-DVI cable or an HDMI cable with an  
HDMI/DVI adapter, stereo audio cables  
Connecting a Computer to the TV  
Computer with DVI Digital Monitor Output  
If the computer’s audio output is a single mini jack, a mini  
audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adapter cable is also required.  
Required: DVI-to-DVI cable, stereo audio cables  
If the computer’s audio output is a single mini jack, a mini  
audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adapter cable is also required.  
1. Connect the computer’s HDMI output to the TV’s  
PC-DVI jack. Use either an HDMI-to-DVI cable or an  
HDMI cable with an HDMI/DVI adapter.  
1. Connect the DVI-to-DVI cable from the computer DVI  
output to the PC-DVI jack on the TV back panel.  
2. Connect the left (white) and right (red) audio cables  
from the computer’s AUDIO OUT to PC-DVI  
AUDIO on the TV back panel.  
2. Connect the left (white) and right (red) audio cables  
from AUDIO OUT on the PC back panel to  
PC-DVI AUDIO on the TV back panel.  
*
ꢄꢃ  
1$ꢀ%7*ꢁ  
"6%*0  
1$ꢀ%7*ꢁ  
"6%*0  
-&'5  
3*()5  
ꢄꢃ  
1$ꢀꢁꢀ%7*  
1$ꢄꢀꢄ%7*  
57ꢁ#BDLꢁ1BOFM  
ꢂꢃ  
ꢂꢃ  
%7*ꢀUPꢀ%7*ꢁ$BCMF  
)%.*ꢀUPꢀ%7*ꢁ$BCMF  
ꢂꢃ  
ꢂꢃ  
1FSTPOBMꢁ$PNQVUFSꢁXJUIꢁ%7*ꢁ0VUQVU  
ꢄꢃ  
1FSTPOBMꢁ$PNQVUFSꢁXJUIꢁ)%.*ꢁ0VUQVUꢁ  
$6) /54  
!5$)/ /54  
!5$)/ /54  
ꢄꢃ  
Figure 2. Connecting a personal computer with DVI Monitor  
Output  
Figure 3. Connecting a personal computer with an HDMI  
monitor output  
90  
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
Connecting a Computer to the TV,  
continued  
Computer with VGA 15-Pin Monitor Output  
(Analog Video)  
Required: 15-pin computer VGA-to-DVI-A/VGA-to-DVI-D  
cable or a VGA computer cable and a DVI/VGA adapter,  
stereo audio cable.  
If the computer’s audio output is a single mini jack, a mini  
audio-to-RCA-male “Y” adapter cable is also required.  
IMPORTANT  
To use this connection, you must first select the  
Analog setting in the PC DVI box of the NetCommand  
menu. See the “Setup” section for more.  
1. Connect the computer’s PC MONITOR OUT to  
PC-DVI on the TV back panel. Use either a VGA-  
to-DVI monitor cable or a VGA computer cable with a  
VGA/DVI adapter.  
2. Connect the left (white) and right (red) audio cables  
from the computer’s analog audio ouput to PC-DVI  
AUDIO on the TV back panel.  
-&'5  
3*()5  
*
1$ꢄꢀꢄ%7*  
7("ꢁUPꢁ%7*ꢀ$BCMF  
$PNQVUFSꢀXJUIꢀ7("ꢀ.POJUPSꢀ0VUQVU  
Figure 4. Connecting a computer with a VGA 15-pin monitor  
output.  
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
91  
table on the next page showing possible PC formats.  
Depending on your computer’s operating system,  
adjust the resolution with either:  
Adjusting Image Resolution  
Your Mitsubishi TV can display resolutions from standard  
VGA (640 x 480) through 1920 x 1080 signals at a refresh  
rate of 60 Hz. The resolution of 1920 x 1080 is supported  
at refresh rates of 24, 30, and 60 Hz. See Appendix B in  
this book for more on compatible screen resolutions.  
the Screen area slider.  
the Screen Resolution slider  
6. To change the refresh rate, click on the Advanced  
button.  
When connecting a computer providing digital video, in  
most cases the computer will select the best resolution  
match to display on the TV. You can override this setting  
if you wish. For a computer providing analog video, you  
may need to set the resolution manually. The instruc-  
tions below are for setting the resolution on most personal  
computers.  
7. On the Monitor tab, select a setting from the Screen  
refresh rate drop-down list. The resolution of 1920  
x 1080 is supported at refresh rates of 24, 30, and 60  
Hz; other resolutions are supported at 60 Hz only.  
You may need to restart the computer for this change to  
take effect.  
1. In the PC’s Start menu, select Settings.  
2. Select Control Panel.  
NOTE: Whenever the TV is powered on, the lamp is in  
use, even if the TV screen appears dark. As a  
reminder that the TV is powered on and that time  
is being added to the lamp’s elapsed hours, set  
the computer’s screen saver to a pattern that will  
display after several minutes of inactivity.  
3. Select Display.  
4. Choose the Settings tab.  
5. Change the resolution to the highest resolution with  
the aspect ratio best suited for the image. See the  
ꢄꢁ  
ꢅꢁ  
ꢆꢁ  
ꢀꢁ  
ꢃꢁ  
ꢂꢁ  
Figure 5. Computer resolution, XGA selection  
92  
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer  
Computer Display Formats  
Repeatedly press the FORMAT key to cycle through the TV  
displays available for your computer’s video signal.  
Computer Signal  
As Displayed on TV Screen  
16 X 9 Standard 4 X 3 Standard  
Format  
VGA  
640 X 480  
WVGA  
848 X 480  
SVGA  
800 X 600  
WSVGA  
1064 X 600  
Format  
Standard  
Zoom  
XGA  
1024 X 768  
PC 720p  
1280 X 720  
WXGA  
1365 X 768  
Format  
Reduced  
Standard  
SXGA  
1280 X 1024  
PC 1080p  
1920 X 1080  
Appendices  
Appendix A: Bypassing the Parental Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Appendices  
95  
Appendix A: Bypassing the  
Parental Lock  
Bypassing the Parental Lock  
After you set the lock, you must use your pass code to  
view a locked program, view the locked TV, cancel the  
lock, or enter the Parental Lock menus.  
If you forget your pass code, you can view the locked TV  
without entering your pass code. When you are prompted  
for your pass code, press the number and QV buttons  
9
on the TV remote control at the same time. This process  
temporarily unlocks the TV  
When entering the Parental Lock menu, this process  
deletes your old pass code and prompts you to enter a  
new pass code.  
You can either enter a new pass code to open the  
Parental Lock menu and make changes or press EXIT to  
close the menu.  
If any of the locks are turned on and you exit the  
menus when prompted for a new code, the old code  
and all lock settings are retained.  
If all locks are turned off and you exit the menus when  
prompted for a new code, then the previous code is  
erased.  
IMPORTANT  
When changing or deleting your pass code,  
you must use the remote control included  
with this TV. You cannot use a Mitsubishi  
remote control from another component or a  
“universal” remote.  
IMPORTANT  
Cut along the dotted line and file bypass  
instructions in a safe place for future  
reference.  
96  
Appendices  
This page intentionally left blank  
Appendices  
97  
Appendix B: Specifications  
Model  
Projection System  
Lamp  
WD-57831, WD-65831  
WD-73831  
DLP, 0.65” chip, 1920 x 1080 pixels with Smooth Picture™  
DLP, 0.843” chip, 1920 x 1080 pixels with Smooth Picture™  
180-watt VIP type  
180-watt VIP type  
Reception  
Over-the-Air: VHF 2–13, UHF 14–69  
Channel Frequency Reception  
Analog Cable: 1–125  
Digital Cable: 1–135  
Analog NTSC, Digital ATSC with sub-channels (all 18 video  
formats)  
Over the Air:  
Channel Type*  
Analog NTSC (non-scrambled)  
Digital QAM 64 and 256 with sub-channels (non-scrambled)  
Cable:  
CableCARD™:  
Authorized scrambled and non-scrambled digital channels  
* Note for Digital Channels: The channel numbers displayed on screen are determined by the broadcaster or cable company and can vary  
from the standard frequency number. If there is no channel-number information provided by the broadcaster or cable company, the TV  
creates a channel number. The created channel number uses the frequency number as the main channel number and the program number  
as the sub-channel number. When using an authorized CableCARD, the channel numbers are determined by the cable company.  
Inputs  
Description  
Qty.  
Signal Type  
Input Specifications  
Antenna/Cable input  
HDMI (digital video/audio)  
2
RF  
F connector, 75-ohm  
2
HDMI EIA-861B stan- HDMI standard connector  
dard for digital audio Video: 60 Hz: 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i  
and video  
24 Hz, 30 Hz, 60 Hz: 1080p  
Audio: PCM stereo  
Note: Not for use with personal computers.  
Video/S-Video  
(one front, two rear)  
3
3
NTSC 480i only  
Video: RCA Pin Plug, 1.0 V p-p, 75 ohm  
S-Video: Four-Pin DIN Plug  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75-ohm  
C: 0.286 Vp-p (burst signal), 75-ohm  
Component Video (Y/Pr/Pb)  
EIA-770.1 & EIA 770.2 RCA Pin Plug (EIA-770.3 Standard Levels and  
480i, 480p, EIA 770.3 Timing)  
720p and 1080i (video Y:  
1.0 Vp-p (includes sync), 75-ohm  
700 mV p-p, 75-ohm  
700 mV p-p, 75-ohm  
standards)  
Pr:  
Pb:  
Audio Inputs  
analog left and right  
audio  
9 pairs  
RCA Pin Plug 500 mV (full scale), 43-k ohm  
PC DVI-I Input  
1
analog and digital  
computer video  
VGA (640 x 480, 60 Hz)  
W-VGA (848 x 480, 60 Hz)  
SVGA (800 x 600, 60 Hz)  
W-SVGA (1064 x 600, 60 Hz)  
XGA (1024 x 768, 60 Hz)  
1280 x 720, 60 Hz  
(not for use with other  
audio/video products)  
SXGA (1280 x 1024, 60 Hz)  
1920 x 1080 (24 Hz, 30 Hz, 60 Hz)  
WXGA (1360 x 768, 60 Hz)  
98  
Appendices  
Appendix B: Specifications, continued  
Outputs  
Description  
Qty. Output Specifications  
Video: RCA Pin Plug 1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohm  
Signal Type: NTSC 480i only  
Video  
1
+
2
RCA Pin Plug, 500 mV rms 200 mV (full scale) for analog sources, 1.5  
Audio (Signal)  
+
pairs Vrms 0.5 Vrms (full scale) for digital sources.  
Audio (Speakers)  
2
5.5" x 2.2"  
Digital Interfaces  
Digital Audio Output  
1
3
RCA Pin Plug, Signal Type, Dolby Digital, PCM  
IEEE 1394 Four-Pin-Type Terminal, S400  
IEEE 1394 (input/output)  
(2 rear, 1 front)  
Physical Characteristics and Power Consumption  
Dimensions (inches)  
Model  
Weight  
Power Consumption  
Height  
36 3/16  
40 3/4  
44 3/4  
Width  
51 1/2  
58 1/2  
69 7/8  
Depth  
17 15/16  
19 13/16  
21 5/16  
WD-57831  
WD-65831  
WD-73831  
85.8 lbs.  
99.0 lbs.  
190.0 lbs.  
250 w  
250 w  
290 w  
IEEE 1394 System Compatibility  
This television is designed to conform to IEEE 1394 AV/C Software standards in effect at the time of development.  
This networking and control technology is designed to provide high-performance digital connections and product  
control, making the product easier to use.  
Mitsubishi D-VHS VCRs are fully compatible with this TV in audio, video, and control.  
As other manufacturers distribute products that use the IEEE 1394 AV/C standards, they will be responsible for  
developing products that meet the standards of the technology, as well as compatibility testing with other products.  
Mitsubishi cannot be responsible for their efforts, and therefore cannot promise compatibility with these other prod-  
ucts. Any compatibility problems with other manufacturers’ products should be brought to the attention of those  
manufacturers.  
HDMI  
The HDMI input is compliant with EIA-861B standards for standard, extended, and high-definition video; digital audio,  
and HDCP copy protection. The HDMI inputs on this TV are not intended for use with personal computers or devices  
outputting video signals with computer resolutions.  
Appendices  
99  
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement  
CAUTION  
BURN DANGER!  
During normal operation, the surfaces inside  
the TV near the lamp are extremely hot.  
TOUCH THE LAMP CARTRIDGE BY THE HANDLE ONLY  
Do not touch the glass parts of the lamp cartridge.  
CAUTION: If the television is on, press POWER to turn it off. Unplug the television and allow  
it to cool for at least one hour before attempting to replace the lamp cartridge.  
Lamp  
The light source for this television is a lamp, which is part of a lamp cartridge assembly. The life of the lamp can vary,  
based on the lamp itself, the air temperature around the TV while it is operating, and your viewing patterns. Warmer air  
or poor ventilation shorten the lamp life, as does turning the television on and off frequently. Mitsubishi warrants the  
lamp for one (1) year from the date of original TV purchase at retail.  
To Order a New Lamp  
To Receive a Replacement Lamp Under Warranty  
Call (800) 553-7278. Please have model number, serial number, and TV purchase date available.  
Important: All lamps replaced under warranty must be returned to Mitsubishi where they will be inspected for defect  
verification.  
To Purchase a Replacement Lamp After Warranty  
Visit our website at www.mitsuparts.com or call (800) 553-7278. Order the new lamp part number shown below.  
TV Model Number  
Lamp Part Number  
WD-57831  
WD-65831  
WD-73831  
915P049020  
WARNING  
Do not remove the lamp cartridge immediately after turning off the television. You may get burned because the  
lamp is very hot. Allow the television to cool for at least one hour before replacing the lamp cartridge.  
Do not remove the lamp cartridge except when replacing it. Careless treatment can result in injury or fire.  
Do not touch the lamp glass element. It may be very hot and break, causing injuries or burns.  
Be sure not to insert any metal or flammable object into the lamp cartridge opening, as it may cause fire or electri-  
cal shock. If a foreign object is inserted into the opening, unplug the AC cord of the TV and contact your dealer for  
service.  
Install the lamp cartridge securely. Failure to do so may cause a fire.  
Do not touch the lamp glass elements. Oils from your fingers may cause premature lamp failure.  
THE LAMP INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR  
DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS. For disposal or recy-  
cling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance at  
Hg  
= MERCURY  
www.eiae.org  
100  
Appendices  
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement, continued  
WARNING  
THE COVER IS PROVIDED WITH AN INTERLOCK TO  
REDUCE THE RISK OF EXCESSIVE ULTRAVIOLET  
RADIATION. DO NOT DEFEAT ITS PURPOSE  
OR ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE TV WITHOUT  
REMOVING THE COVER COMPLETELY.  
Figure 1.  
Handle  
(step 5)  
Removing the Old Lamp Cartridge  
1. Turn off TV power and allow the lamp to cool for at  
least one hour before proceeding.  
2. After the lamp has cooled, remove the cover. Refer  
to figure 1. Use a #2 (large) Phillips screwdriver to  
remove the two screws securing the cover. Keep the  
screws and cover for re-installation  
3. With a large flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the two shiny  
screws securing the lamp cartridge until they disengage  
from the mating threads. These are captive screws and  
cannot be separated from the lamp cartridge.  
Figure 2  
4. Fully open up the bag supplied with the replacement  
lamp and set the opened bag aside.  
d. Carefully push in the cartridge until it is fully  
seated. If the cartridge does not slide in  
smoothly, gently wiggle the handle from side to  
side while pushing in.  
5. Gently grasp the handle of the lamp cartridge and pull  
the old cartridge straight out. See figures 1 and 2.  
CAUTION: Do not tilt or rotate the cartridge, as  
small glass fragments may fall out.  
Guide in lamp  
compartment  
6. Without tilting or putting down the lamp cartridge,  
insert it into the opened bag. Close the bag while  
being careful not to let any glass particles fall out.  
Installing the New Lamp Cartridge  
1. Do not touch the glass parts of the new lamp car-  
tridge. Insert the new cartridge into the TV using the  
following guidelines:  
Figure 5  
a. Refer to figures 3 and 4 and note the location of  
the top and bottom guides inside the lamp com-  
partment and the corresponding grooves on the  
top and underside of the lamp.  
2. With either your fingers or the screwdriver, gently  
tighten the two shiny screws. If using a screwdriver,  
use only two fingers for final tightening. AVOID  
OVERTIGHTENING!  
b. Hold the lamp cartridge level with the lamp com-  
3. Replace the plastic cover and retaining screws.  
partment, oriented as shown in figure 5.  
4. WASH YOUR HANDS THOROUGHLY, AS THIS  
LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY.  
c. Align the grooves on the cartridge with the top  
and bottom guides in the lamp compartment. See  
figure 5.  
Disposal of the Old Lamp Cartridge  
Lamp under warranty: All lamps replaced under war-  
ranty must be returned to Mitsubishi. Use the return  
shipping label provided and send to Mitsubishi Digital  
Electronics, America, 1001 Cherry Drive, Suite 2, Brasel-  
ton, GA 30517.  
Guides inside the  
lamp compartment  
IMPORTANT: Lamps found to be without defect will  
be returned and charged back to the sender.  
Lamp no longer under warranty: Contact your  
local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance at  
www.eiae.com for lamp-disposal or recycling instructions.  
Do not dispose of the old lamp with common trash.  
Figure 4  
Grooves are on the top and  
underside of the lamp cartridge  
Figure 3  
Appendices  
101  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
This appendix explains how to program the TV’s remote  
control to operate other A/V devices. This is distinct from  
NetCommand “Learning.” To summarize: the TV’s remote  
control can be made to operate other devices by two dif-  
ferent methods:  
VCRs and DVRs  
CH  
POWER  
SLEEP  
/
(
(
(
RECORD  
REVERSE  
STOP  
)
)
)
(
(
(
FAST FORWARD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
)
GUIDE (DVR only)  
MENU (DVR only)  
0–9 Number Buttons  
Remote Control Programming: you must move  
the slide switch to the position specific to the type  
of device. Programming is available for the  
large remote control only.  
)
)
Mitsubishi VCRs are compatible with some additional  
buttons.  
NetCommand® “Learning”: you can operate  
other devices with the slide switch in the TV posi-  
tion. Position IR emitters in front of the other  
devices and “teach” the devices’ IR signals to the  
TV. “Learned” functions are sent by the TV  
and work with both the large and small remote  
controls.  
Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers  
AUDIO (PAGE UP)  
CANCEL (on some  
models)  
0–9 Number Buttons (on  
some models)  
F1–F4 (A, B, C, D keys on  
some models)  
CH  
/
ENTER (on some models)  
GUIDE (on some models)  
LIST  
The record/playback keys  
(on some models):  
Functions Available for Other A/V Devices  
(
(
(
(
(
(
FAST FORWARD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
RECORD  
REVERSE  
STOP  
)
POWER  
The TV’s remote control can be programmed to operate  
other types and brands of A/V products. To use the  
remote when programmed, set the slide switch to the  
position labelled for the product type. The functions  
performed in each switch position can vary depending on  
the product. Not all functions work for all models. The  
most common functions available are listed on this page.  
)
(on some  
)
models)  
)
VIDEO (PAGE DOWN)  
QV (ENTER; for channels  
)
)
on some models)  
A/V Receivers  
MUTE  
POWER  
SLEEP  
VOLUME  
Direct Input Selection  
buttons: numbers,  
FAV and QV (on some  
Mitsubishi models)  
0–9 Number Buttons  
CD Players  
(not all functions for all models)  
SLEEP  
(
(
REVERSE  
STOP  
)
(
(
(
FAST FORWARD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
)
)
Set the remote control’s slide  
switch to the type of device you  
wish to program or control.  
)
0–9 Number Buttons  
)
DVD and Laser Disc Players  
(not all functions for all models)  
CANCEL (on some  
models)  
(
(
(
(
(
(
FAST FORWARD  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
RECORD  
REVERSE  
STOP  
)
IMPORTANT  
)
CH  
/
(for track  
)
Some manufacturers may change their  
products or they may use more than one  
remote control system. The TV’s remote  
control may be unable to operate your A/V  
equipment in these cases.  
skip on some models)  
ENTER  
MENU  
POWER  
)
)
)
0-9 Number Buttons (on  
some models)  
SLEEP  
(on some  
models)  
102  
Appendices  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
6. Once you have found the correct code, write it in the  
space below for future reference.  
Programming the Remote Control  
Method 1: Code Entry  
Switch Position  
Device Type  
Code  
1. Move the slide switch at the top of the remote to the  
position for the product you want to control. Refer to  
the table below. Only one of each device type can be  
controlled in each slide-switch position.  
CABLE/SAT  
VCR  
DVD  
AUDIO  
Switch Position  
Affected Device  
CABLE/SAT  
Cable Box  
DTV Receiver  
Satellite Receiver  
Method 2: Code Search  
In this method of programming, you step through the  
remote control’s internal code library to find the correct  
code for your A/V product.  
VCR  
VCR  
DVR  
Laser Disc Player  
DVD Player/Recorder  
1. Move the slide switch at the top of the remote control  
to the correct position for the product. See the table  
under “Method 1.”  
DVD  
DVD Player/Recorder  
DVR  
Laser Disc Player  
VCR  
2. Press and hold POWER on the remote control for several  
seconds until the button blinks twice and goes off.  
3. Press keys  
4. Press the number  
switch position and the table below.  
9
9 1  
1,  
2
, or depending on the slide-  
3
AUDIO  
A/V Receiver  
Audio Amplifier  
CD Player*  
Switch Position  
CABLE/SAT  
Number  
1
2
3
2. Press and hold POWER on the remote control for several  
DVD, VCR  
seconds until the button blinks twice and goes off.  
AUDIO  
3. Release the POWER button.  
4. Enter the first five-digit code listed for your equipment.  
5. Press CH  
and POWER repeatedly until the product  
The POWER button blinks twice when you start to  
enter the code and then once for each additional  
keypress.  
responds by powering on or off. You can press CH  
to move backward through the code library if needed.  
NOTE: If the product has no power on/off function, check  
The POWER button blinks twice when you finish  
entering a valid code.  
for a response using a different function. Press  
(
PLAY),  
(
STOP), VOL  
, or MUTE and then re-  
Move the slide switch to another position if you  
need to start over or wish to exit programming  
mode.  
peatedly press CH  
/
to check for a response.  
6. When the product responds, press ENTER to set the  
code.  
5. Point the remote control at the equipment and press  
POWER. If the product has no power on/off function,  
Code Verification  
To determine the code programmed for any position of  
the slide switch:  
press a different key, such as  
(
PLAY),  
(STOP),  
VOL  
, or MUTE.  
If the equipment responds, the remote control is  
properly programmed to operate the equipment.  
1. Move the slide switch to the position you wish to  
verify.  
If the equipment does not respond, repeat steps  
2–4 with the next five-digit code listed for your  
equipment.  
2. Press and hold POWER on the remote control for several  
seconds until the button blinks twice and goes off.  
3. Press keys  
9
9
0
4. Press and count the blinks of the power button.  
1
Write down the number of blinks as the first digit of  
the code.  
IMPORTANT  
5. Repeat step 4 for the second, third, fourth, and fifth  
digits of the code.  
You may need to reprogram the remote  
control after changing the batteries.  
Appendices  
103  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes  
Audio Lock: Universal A/V Receiver Control  
With Audio Lock active, the remote control operates  
the volume and mute functions of the A/V receiver in all  
positions of the slide switch. Activate Audio Lock if you  
normally use an A/V receiver with your TV and other A/V  
equipment.  
Audio Amplifiers  
Brand  
Acurus  
Code  
30765  
Adcom  
31100, 30577  
31742  
30765  
31583  
30674  
30892  
31462, 31461  
30300  
31561  
30647  
30078  
30892  
30331  
30765  
30892  
31561  
31802  
31408  
Altec Lansing  
Aragon  
Bel Canto Design  
Bose  
Carver  
1. Program the AUDIO position for your A/V receiver as  
described earlier in this section.  
2. Move the slide switch to the AUDIO position.  
3. Press and hold POWER on the remote control for several  
Classe  
Curtis Mathes  
Durabrand  
Elan  
seconds until the button blinks twice and goes off.  
4. Press keys  
9
9
3
ENTER  
The POWER button will blink twice to indicate Audio Lock  
is active.  
GE  
Harman/Kardon  
JVC  
Klipsch  
Left Coast  
Lenoxx  
Lexicon  
Logitech  
Marantz  
Mark Levinson  
McIntosh  
Mondial  
Optimus  
Philips  
To Reset the Remote Control to Operate Volume and  
Mute for the TV Speakers  
1. Press and hold POWER for several seconds until the  
button blinks twice and goes off.  
2. Press keys  
9
9
3
VOL  
.
30892  
31483  
30251  
30765  
30823, 30395, 30300  
30892  
The POWER button will blink four times to indicate Audio  
Lock has cleared.  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
RCA  
Realistic  
Sharp  
30823, 30300, 30257, 30013  
30892  
30823, 30300  
30395  
30226  
30815  
30078  
30374, 30372  
30353  
30331  
30078, 30013  
30354  
Resetting the Remote Control  
If the slide switch is set to TV and the TV does not respond  
properly, do the following to reset the remote control.  
1. Press and hold POWER for several seconds until the  
Sony  
button blinks twice and goes off.  
Soundesign  
Technics  
Toshiba  
Victor  
Wards  
Yamaha  
2. Release the POWER button.  
3. Press keys  
0
0
9
3
5
and the POWER button will blink  
twice when you finish entering the code. While enter-  
ing the code, pause for a moment between each key  
press to ensure it is recognized.  
A/V Receivers  
Brand  
ADC  
Code  
30531  
Adcom  
Aiwa  
31617, 31616  
31641, 31405, 31388, 31347,  
31321, 31243, 30189, 30121  
31255  
Akai  
Alco  
AMC  
31390  
31077  
Amplifier Technologies  
Anam  
Apex Digital  
Arcam  
31584  
31609, 31074  
31774, 31430, 31257  
31189  
Atlantic Technology  
Audiophase  
31487  
31387  
104  
Appendices  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes, continued  
A/V Receivers  
Brand  
Code  
RCA  
31609, 31511, 31390, 31254,  
31074, 31023, 30531  
31869  
A/V Receivers  
Rio  
Samsung  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Brand  
Code  
31500, 31295  
31189, 30189  
31801  
31386, 31361  
Audiotronic  
Audiovox  
B & K  
Bel Canto Design  
BK  
31189  
31627, 31390  
30840, 30820, 30701  
31584  
Sharper Image  
31416, 31411, 31410, 31409,  
31385, 31263, 30797  
31077  
31811, 31627, 31602  
31869  
31858, 31759, 31758, 31658,  
31622, 31558, 31529, 31503,  
31458, 31441, 31406, 31382,  
31371, 31367, 31258, 31131,  
31058  
30702  
Bose  
Brix  
31253, 31229, 30639  
31602  
Sherwood  
Sirius  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
Cambridge Soundworks 31477  
Capetronic  
30531  
Carver  
Coby  
31289, 31189, 30189, 30121  
31263  
Curtis  
Delphi  
30797  
31414  
Denon  
Fisher  
31360, 31311, 31142, 30121,  
31801, 31409  
Soundesign  
Stereophonics  
Sunfire  
Sylvania  
Teac  
Technics  
Thorens  
Toshiba  
Venturer  
Wards  
30670  
31023  
31313  
30797  
Fosgate  
Glory Horse  
GPX  
31487  
31263  
31299  
Harman/Kardon  
31306, 31304, 31289, 30891,  
30189, 30110  
31528, 31390, 31267, 31074  
31633, 31518, 31308, 30309  
31189  
30135  
31390, 30849  
30189, 30014  
31414, 31406  
31375, 31331, 31276, 31176,  
30176  
Hitachi  
Integra  
JBL  
31801, 31273  
31320, 31298, 30135  
31306, 30110  
31811, 31643, 31495, 31374,  
31282, 31263, 31058  
31570, 31569, 31313  
31428, 31390  
JVC  
XM  
Yamaha  
Kenwood  
KLH  
Koss  
31497, 31366  
Linn  
Liquid Video  
Magnavox  
30189  
31497  
31514, 31269, 31189, 30531,  
30189  
Marantz  
31289, 31269, 31189, 30200,  
30189,  
CD Players  
Brand  
McIntosh  
Micromega  
Mitsubishi  
31289  
31189  
Code  
30157  
30156  
30157  
30170  
30420  
Aiwa  
31957, 31922, 31921, 31920,  
31393, 30176  
31189  
31555, 31313, 30097  
31320, 31298, 30842, 30135  
31074, 31023, 30849, 30797,  
30670, 30531  
Akai  
Arcam  
Myryad  
Nakamichi  
Onkyo  
Audio-Technica  
Burmester  
California Audio Labs 30303, 30029  
Carver  
Classic  
Denon  
DKK  
DMX Electronics  
Emerson  
Fisher  
Garrard  
Gemini  
Optimus  
30437, 30299, 30179, 30157  
31297  
30873, 30034, 30003  
30000  
30157  
Oritron  
Outlaw  
Panasonic  
31497, 31366  
31487  
31764, 31763, 31633, 31548,  
31518, 31509, 31363, 31350,  
31316, 31308, 31288, 30309  
31368, 31365, 31283, 31269,  
31268, 31266, 31189, 30189  
31384, 31343, 31023, 30630,  
30531, 30150, 30014  
31414, 31289, 30189  
31254  
30305  
31325, 30179, 30174  
30420, 30393  
30625  
30305, 30032  
31296  
31202, 30173, 30157, 30083  
30032  
30101  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Genexxa  
GPX  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Polk Audio  
Proscan  
RadioShack  
31263  
Integra  
Appendices  
105  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes, continued  
CD Players  
Brand  
TAG McLaren  
Tascam  
TDK  
Code  
30157  
30420  
31208  
CD Players  
Brand  
JVC  
Code  
Teac  
30420, 30393, 30378, 30180,  
30174  
30303, 30029  
31553  
30299, 30019  
30072  
30157, 30053  
31292, 30888, 30490, 30261,  
30187, 30170, 30036,  
30625  
31294, 30072  
30826, 30681, 30626, 30190,  
30037, 30028,  
31711, 31373, 31372, 31318  
31317  
30157  
31208  
30157  
Kenwood  
Technics  
Tivoli Audio  
Toshiba  
Victor  
Wards  
Yamaha  
KLH  
Koss  
Krell  
LG  
Linn  
LXI  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
30305  
YBA  
Yorx  
30305, 30157, 30038  
30626, 30435, 30180, 30157,  
30038, 30029  
31484  
30660, 30290, 30256  
30029  
30461  
Mark Levinson  
McIntosh  
MCS  
MGA  
Miro  
30083  
30000  
Mission  
Mitsubishi  
MTC  
NAD  
Nikko  
NSM  
Onkyo  
Optimus  
30157  
Cable Boxes  
Brand  
30098, 30083  
30625, 30420  
30299, 30019  
30625, 30174, 30170  
30157  
31327, 30868, 30102, 30101  
31075, 31063, 30468, 30437,  
30420, 30305, 30179, 30145,  
30087, 30037, 30032, 30000  
30752, 30388, 30303, 30029  
30420  
30626, 30274, 30157  
31087, 31063, 31062, 30551,  
30468, 30305, 30032  
30157  
30420  
30157  
Code  
ABC  
10017, 10014, 10013, 10011,  
10008, 10007, 10003, 10001  
10315, 10153  
10899  
10207, 10022  
10797, 10207, 10153, 10022  
10267  
10056  
10014  
10899  
10056  
10022  
10022  
10153  
10315, 10153  
10883  
10883  
10031, 10025  
10040  
10019  
10883  
Allegro  
Americast  
Antronix  
Archer  
BBT  
Belcor  
Bell & Howell  
Bell South  
Cable Star  
Cabletenna  
Cableview  
Century  
Panasonic  
Parasound  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Proceed  
Proton  
QED  
Quad  
Quasar  
RadioShack  
RCA  
Citizen  
Clearmaster  
ClearMax  
Colour Voice  
Comtronics  
Contec  
Coolmax  
Digeo  
Digi  
Director  
Dumont  
30157  
30157  
30029  
31075  
31062, 30764, 30468, 30420,  
30305, 30179, 30053, 30032  
30420, 30180, 30179  
30420, 30157  
30157  
11187  
10637  
10476  
10637  
Realistic  
Rotel  
SAE  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Scott  
Sears  
Sharp  
Sherwood  
Sonic Frontiers  
Sony  
30305, 30157  
30179, 30087  
30305  
Eastern  
10002  
10797  
10040, 10015  
10400  
10153  
10207, 10056  
10797, 10015  
10810, 10476, 10276, 10011,  
10003  
10144, 10040  
10797  
Emerson  
Everquest  
Focus  
Garrard  
GC Electronics  
Gemini  
30305  
30861, 30265, 30180, 30037  
31067, 30180  
30157  
31364, 30673, 30605, 30604,  
30490, 30185, 30100, 30000  
30145  
General Instrument  
Soundesign  
Sugden  
Symphonic  
GoldStar  
Goodmind  
30157  
30305  
106  
Appendices  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Cable Boxes  
Programming Codes, continued  
Brand  
Code  
10258  
Tandy  
TeleCaption  
Teleview  
10221  
10040  
10001  
10310  
11256  
10418, 10040  
10013, 10012  
10003  
10000  
10883  
10015  
10063  
10207, 10153, 10022  
10007  
10207, 10191, 10153, 10056,  
10022,  
10883  
10883  
10258, 10063, 10027  
10883  
Cable Boxes  
Brand  
Code  
Texscan  
TFC  
Thomson  
Timeless  
Tocom  
Torx  
Toshiba  
Tristar  
Tusa  
TV86  
Unika  
United Artists  
Universal  
Hamlin  
10273, 10259, 10034, 10020,  
10009  
10011  
10007  
11602  
Hitachi  
Hytex  
i3 Micro  
Jasco  
10315, 10153, 10015  
10810, 10476,10276, 10024,  
10015, 10014, 10012, 10011,  
10003  
10440  
10027  
10000  
11376, 11254, 11187, 11106,  
10810, 10476, 10276, 10014  
10156, 10063  
10883  
11602  
10618  
10156, 10063  
10019, 10007  
Jerrold  
Linsay  
Magnavox  
Memorex  
Motorola  
V2  
Movie Time  
Multitech  
Myrio  
Novaplex  
NSC  
Oak  
Optimus  
Pace  
Viewmaster  
Viewstar  
Vision  
Vortex View  
Zenith  
10883  
10899, 10525, 10054, 10000  
10400  
Zentek  
10021  
11877, 10237, 10008  
Panasonic  
Panther  
Paragon  
Philips  
10107, 10021, 10000  
10637  
10000  
11305, 10317, 10153, 10031,  
10027, 10025  
11877, 10877, 10533, 10144,  
10023  
10400  
10000  
10000  
10883, 10797, 10315, 10015  
11256, 10021  
10207  
10400  
10279, 10273, 10259, 10020  
10002  
10011  
10000  
10144, 10040  
11877, 10877, 10477, 10017,  
10008,  
10510  
11602  
10040, 10015  
10011  
10040  
11006  
10021  
10015, 10003  
10797, 10040, 10015  
10015  
10422  
10276  
10883  
10001  
DVD Players/Recorders  
Pioneer  
Brand  
Code  
Adcom  
Aiwa  
21094  
20641  
Popular Mechanics  
Pulsar  
Quasar  
RadioShack  
RCA  
Realistic  
Recoton  
Regal  
Regency  
Rembrandt  
Runco  
Samsung  
Scientific Atlanta  
Akai  
Alco  
21089, 20770  
20790  
Allegro  
Amphion Media Works  
AMW  
20869  
20872  
20872  
Apex Digital  
21100, 21061, 21056, 21020,  
21004, 20797, 20796, 20794,  
20755, 20717, 20672  
21407, 21168  
20736  
Aspire Digital  
Audiologic  
Audiovox  
21072, 21041, 20790  
21072  
Axion  
B & K  
20662, 20655  
21571  
20717  
20571  
20695  
Seam  
Sejin  
Signal  
Signature  
SL Marx  
Sony  
Sprucer  
Starcom  
Stargate  
Starquest  
StarSight  
Supercable  
Supermax  
Sylvania  
Bel Canto Design  
Blaupunkt  
Blue Parade  
Broksonic  
California Audio Labs 20490  
CAVS  
Cinea  
21057  
20831  
CineVision  
Citizen  
Coby  
20876, 20869, 20833  
21277  
21351, 21177, 21165, 21107,  
21086, 20852, 20778  
20831  
Craig  
Appendices  
107  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes, continued  
DVD Players/Recorders  
Brand  
Code  
Memorex  
Microsoft  
Mintek  
Mitsubishi  
Momitsu  
Myryad  
NAD  
Nakamichi  
NEC  
21270, 20831, 20695  
20522  
20839, 20717  
21521, 20521  
21082  
20894  
20741, 20692, 20591  
21222  
20785  
20717  
20826  
21402  
21265, 21107, 21003, 20872  
20792, 20627, 20503  
20896  
20651  
21762, 20703, 20632, 20503,  
20490  
21354, 21267, 20675, 20646,  
20539, 20503,  
21024  
21571, 20632, 20631, 20571,  
20525  
21086, 21061, 21020  
20539  
20770  
20674  
20672  
20522  
20778  
20651  
20822, 20790, 20717, 20571,  
20522  
20869  
21360  
21178, 20623  
20823  
20752, 20698  
21075, 21044, 20820, 20744,  
20573, 20490  
20695  
20873, 20695, 20670  
21158  
21256, 20752, 20675, 20630  
21117  
21077, 21043, 20770, 20633  
20839, 20533  
20674  
DVD Players/Recorders  
Brand  
Code  
Curtis Mathes  
CyberHome  
21087  
21129, 21117, 21024, 21023,  
20874, 20816  
21242, 21234, 21172, 21169,  
20869, 20833, 20784, 20705  
20872  
Daewoo  
Daytek  
Denon  
Desay  
Nesa  
20634, 20490  
21407  
Next Base  
NexxTech  
Norcent  
Onkyo  
OptoMedia Electronics  
Oritron  
Disney  
Dual  
Durabrand  
DVD2000  
Emerson  
Enterprise  
Fisher  
21270, 20675  
21085, 21068  
21127  
20521  
21268, 20675, 20591  
20591  
Panasonic  
20670  
Philips  
Funai  
Gateway  
GE  
21334, 21268, 20675  
21158, 21077, 21073  
20815, 20717, 20522  
21730, 21304, 21158, 21144,  
21099, 21075,21044, 20869,  
20833, 20783, 20744, 20741,  
20715  
PianoDisc  
Pioneer  
Go Video  
Polaroid  
Polk Audio  
Portland  
Princeton  
Proceed  
Proscan  
ProVision  
Qwestar  
RCA  
Go Vision  
GoldStar  
GPX  
Gradiente  
Greenhill  
Grundig  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Hiteker  
iLo  
21072  
20741  
20769, 20699  
20490  
20717  
20539  
20702, 20582  
20664, 20573  
20672  
Rio  
RJTech  
Rotel  
Rowa  
Sampo  
Samsung  
21348  
Initial  
Integra  
Jaton  
20717  
20627, 20571  
21078  
JBL  
JSI  
20702  
21423  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Sensory Science  
Sharp  
Sharper Image  
Sherwood  
Shinsonic  
Sigma Designs  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
JVC  
21275, 21164, 20867, 20623,  
20558  
jWin  
21051, 21049  
20790  
20737, 20682, 20534, 20490  
21149, 21020, 20790, 20717  
20721, 20711  
21423, 20896, 20651  
20826  
21173, 20798  
21533  
21127  
20869, 20801, 20741, 20591  
21440, 21416, 21158, 21058  
20511  
20675, 20646, 20539, 20503  
21159, 20782  
20539  
Kawasaki  
Kenwood  
KLH  
Konka  
Koss  
Landel  
Lasonic  
Lecson  
Lenoxx  
LG  
LiteOn  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Malata  
Marantz  
McIntosh  
21099, 20869  
21533, 21431, 21033, 20864,  
20533  
Sungale  
SVA  
21074  
21105, 20860  
21268, 20675  
21268, 20675  
20894  
20809, 20790  
20703, 20490  
20730  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
TAG McLaren  
Teac  
Technics  
Technosonic  
21533, 21273  
108  
Appendices  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes, continued  
Satellite Receivers  
Brand  
DirecTV  
Code  
11856, 11749, 11640, 11639,  
11609, 11444, 11443, 11442,  
11414, 11392, 11377, 11142,  
11109, 11108, 11076, 10819,  
10749, 10724, 10639, 10566,  
10392, 10247, 10099  
DVD Players/Recorders  
Brand  
Code  
Techwood  
Terapin  
Theta Digital  
Toshiba  
Tredex  
20692  
21031  
20571  
21154, 20695, 20503  
Dish Network System 11775, 11505, 11170, 11005,  
20804, 20803, 20800, 20799  
10775,  
Urban Concepts  
US Logic  
Venturer  
Vizio  
Vocopro  
Xbox  
20503  
20839  
20790  
21226, 21064  
21027  
20522  
Dishpro  
Echostar  
11775, 11505, 11005, 10775  
11775, 11505, 11170, 11005,  
10775  
11775, 10775  
10566, 10392  
10869  
11775, 10775  
11246  
11535  
11250, 10819  
11775, 10775  
11749, 11444, 11443, 11442,  
11142, 10749  
11535  
Expressvu  
GE  
General Instrument  
GOI  
Goodmans  
Hisense  
Hitachi  
Xwave  
21001  
20545, 20539, 20490  
20872  
20869, 20741, 20591, 20503  
21265  
Yamaha  
Yamakawa  
Zenith  
Zoece  
HTS  
Hughes Network  
Systems  
iLo  
Jerrold  
JVC  
LG  
Magnavox  
Memorex  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
NEC  
10869  
11775, 11170, 10775  
11414, 11226  
10724, 10722  
10724  
10749  
10869, 10856  
11270  
Laser Disc Players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Code  
20203  
Carver  
Denon  
20323, 20194, 20064  
20243, 20241, 20172, 20059  
Disco Vision  
Funai  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
NAD  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Quasar  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Sega  
20023  
20203  
20194  
20023  
Next Level  
Panasonic  
Paysat  
10869  
10701, 10247  
10724  
11749, 11442, 11142, 11076,  
10819, 10749, 10724, 10722,  
10099  
11442  
10566, 10392  
11535  
20258  
Philips  
20243, 20241, 20217, 20194  
20194, 20064  
20059  
20059  
20059  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
Proton  
RadioShack  
RCA  
20204  
10869  
20194,20064  
20059, 20023  
20194  
20204  
20203  
20323  
20023  
20270, 20201, 20193  
20204  
20194  
11392, 10855, 10566, 10392,  
10143,  
11609, 11442, 11377, 11276,  
11142, 11109, 11108  
11219  
11640, 11639, 10639  
10869  
11444, 11443, 11442, 11142  
11749, 11285, 10819, 10790,  
10749  
11640, 11392  
10724, 10722  
11535  
11535  
10869  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sony  
Star Choice  
Tivo  
Toshiba  
Sony  
Technics  
Theta Digital  
Yamaha  
20451, 20217  
UltimateTV  
Uniden  
US Digital  
USDTV  
Voom  
Satellite Receivers  
Brand  
AlphaStar  
Chaparral  
Crossdigital  
Code  
10772  
10216  
11109  
Zenith  
11856  
Appendices  
109  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes, continued  
VCRs and DVRs  
Brand  
Code  
Harman/Kardon  
Harwood  
Headquarter  
Hewlett Packard  
HI-Q  
20081, 20075, 20038  
20072, 20068  
20046  
21972  
VCRs and DVRs  
Brand  
ABS  
Admiral  
Adventura  
Aiko  
Code  
21972  
20047  
20479, 20209, 20048  
20000  
20278  
20307, 20124, 20037, 20000  
20242, 20175, 20106, 20061,  
20041  
21972  
20278  
20035  
20240  
20278, 20037  
20240  
20104  
20479, 20295, 20209, 20184,  
20121, 20002  
20037  
20035  
20020  
20081  
20278, 20072  
20278, 20037  
20072  
20271, 20240, 20072, 20047,  
20037  
20760, 20162, 20060, 20041,  
20035  
20240  
Hitachi  
20105, 20089, 20042, 20041,  
20000  
21972  
21972  
Howard Computers  
HP  
Hughes Network Systems 20739, 20042  
Humax  
Hush  
iBUYPOWER  
Jensen  
JVC  
KEC  
Kenwood  
KLH  
Kodak  
LG  
Linksys  
Lloyd’s  
Logik  
LXI  
Magnasonic  
Magnavox  
Aiwa  
Akai  
20739  
21972  
21972  
20041  
Alienware  
America Action  
American High  
Asha  
21162, 20067, 20041, 20008  
20278, 20037  
20067, 20041, 20038  
20072  
20037, 20035  
21037  
21972  
20208, 20000  
20072  
Audiovox  
Beaumark  
Bell & Howell  
Broksonic  
Calix  
Canon  
Capehart  
Carver  
CCE  
Citizen  
Colt  
20037  
20593  
20593, 20563, 20149, 20110,  
20081, 20039, 20035, 20000  
20240  
20081, 20035  
20037  
21162, 20162, 20035  
21972  
20035  
21262, 21162, 21037, 20479,  
20307, 20240, 20209, 20162,  
20104, 20048, 20047, 20046,  
20039, 20037, 20035, 20000  
20240, 20061, 20043  
20240  
Craig  
Magnin  
Marantz  
Marta  
Matsushita  
Media Center PC  
MEI  
Curtis Mathes  
Cybernex  
CyberPower  
Daewoo  
21972  
20637, 20561, 20278, 20045,  
20020  
20020  
21972  
20042  
20739  
20039, 20038  
20000  
20043, 20037  
20037  
20032  
21593, 20637, 20593, 20561,  
20479, 20295, 20278, 20212,  
20209, 20208, 20184, 20121,  
20068, 20061, 20043, 20037,  
20036, 20002, 20000  
20104, 20066, 20054, 20047  
20035, 20033  
21593, 20593, 20000  
20000  
Memorex  
Daytron  
Dell  
Denon  
DirecTV  
Durabrand  
Dynatech  
Electrohome  
Electrophonic  
Emerex  
MGA  
MGN Technology  
Microsoft  
Mind  
Minolta  
Mitsubishi  
21972  
21972  
20105, 20042  
20443, 20242, 20214, 20173,  
20075, 20067, 20061, 20043  
20048, 20035  
20240, 20000  
20072, 20000  
20104, 20067, 20041, 20040,  
20038  
20037  
20034  
21972  
20240  
Emerson  
Motorola  
MTC  
Multitech  
NEC  
Fisher  
Fuji  
Funai  
Garrard  
Gateway  
GE  
Nikko  
Nikon  
Niveus Media  
Noblex  
Northgate  
Olympus  
Onkyo  
21972  
21972  
20035  
20222  
20761, 20760, 20240, 20202,  
20060, 20035  
20643, 20526, 20432, 20240  
20038, 20037  
20000  
Go Video  
GoldStar  
Gradiente  
Harley Davidson  
Optimus  
21262, 21162, 21062, 21048,  
20593, 20432, 20162, 20104,  
20048, 20037  
20000  
110  
Appendices  
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control  
Programming Codes, continued  
VCRs and DVRs  
Brand  
STS  
Code  
20042  
Sylvania  
21593, 20593, 20110, 20081,  
20043, 20035, 20000  
21593, 20593, 20000  
21972  
21972  
20041  
20041, 20000  
20162, 20035  
20037, 20035, 20000  
20000  
21503, 20739, 20636, 20618  
20240, 20208, 20036  
21972, 21503, 21008, 20212,  
20210, 20209, 20066, 20045,  
20043  
20240, 20037  
21972  
20240  
20045  
20040, 20038  
20061, 20045, 20040  
20037  
20240  
21972  
20000  
21972  
20760, 20240, 20212, 20149,  
20081, 20072, 20062, 20060,  
20048, 20047, 20042, 20035,  
20000  
20637, 20209, 20072  
20072, 20035, 20000  
20038  
21139, 20637, 20479, 20209,  
20039, 20034, 20033, 20000  
21972  
VCRs and DVRs  
Brand  
Optonica  
Orion  
Code  
Symphonic  
Systemax  
Tagar Systems  
Tatung  
20062  
20479, 20295, 20209, 20184,  
20002  
21262, 21162, 21062, 20616,  
20225, 20162, 20077, 20035  
20240, 20054, 20042, 20040,  
20038, 20037, 20035  
20105, 20042  
Panasonic  
Penney  
Teac  
Technics  
Teknika  
Thomas  
Tivo  
TMK  
Toshiba  
Pentax  
Philco  
Philips  
20035  
21181, 21081, 20739, 20618,  
20110, 20081, 20062, 20035  
20037  
20067  
20081  
Pilot  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Portland  
Profitronic  
Proscan  
Protec  
Pulsar  
Quarter  
Quartz  
Quasar  
RadioShack  
Radix  
Randex  
RCA  
Totevision  
Touch  
Unitech  
20020  
20240  
Vector  
20761, 20760, 20202, 20060  
20072  
20039  
20046  
20046  
21162, 20162, 20077, 20035  
21037, 20000  
20037  
Vector Research  
Video Concepts  
Videomagic  
Videosonic  
Viewsonic  
Villain  
Voodoo  
Wards  
20037  
20880, 20761, 20760, 20240,  
20202, 20149, 20106, 20105,  
20077, 20060, 20042  
20104, 20066, 20062, 20048,  
20047, 20046, 20037, 20035,  
20000  
20616, 20614  
21972  
20034  
White Westinghouse  
XR-1000  
Yamaha  
Realistic  
Zenith  
ReplayTV  
Ricavision  
Ricoh  
ZT Group  
Runco  
Salora  
20039  
20075  
Samsung  
Samtron  
Sanky  
20739, 20240, 20045  
20643  
20048, 20039  
20479, 20271, 20209, 20067,  
20041, 20000  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Scott  
Sears  
20240, 20159, 20104, 20047,  
20046  
20212, 20210, 20184, 20121,  
20045, 20043  
20105, 20104, 20066, 20054,  
20047, 20046, 20042, 20037,  
20035, 20000  
Sharp  
20848, 20062, 20048  
20072  
20240  
Shintom  
Shogun  
Singer  
20072  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
20616, 20614  
21972, 21032, 20636, 20035,  
20034, 20033, 20032, 20000  
21972  
Stack 9  
Appendices  
111  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting  
TV Reset Comparison Guide  
(a channel from ANT 1 ANT 2, a cable box, or satellite  
,
You can resolve many common TV problems using the  
reset functions described in the following table. See also  
the additional troubleshooting suggestions later in this  
appendix.  
receiver), first check other channels from the same input  
before changing settings. If most other channels from the  
same input seem correct, there is likely a problem with the  
broadcast rather than with the TV. Use care in this case,  
as changes you make to fix problems on individual chan-  
nels also affect all other channels on the same input.  
IMPORTANT  
Before you change sound or picture settings: If picture  
or sound settings seem wrong for a broadcast channel  
Reset Name  
When to Use  
How to Use  
Resulting Action  
Demo Mode  
Turn-Off  
To turn off the retail demo 1. While viewing the TV, press MENU to  
The demo mode will be turned off.  
The Demo Mode Off button in  
the setup menu will turn gray and  
be unselectable. The demo mode  
slide show cannot be turned on  
mode slide show.  
display the TV Main menu with the  
Setup icon highlighted.  
2. Press ENTER to display the Setup menu.  
3. When the Setup menu is displayed,  
use to highlight the Demo Mode Off again.  
button and press ENTER  
.
Format  
When the picture shape  
seems incorrect, use  
FORMAT to change the  
shape of the picture.  
Press the FORMAT key to cycle through the  
available formats to find the best format for type is memorized for each input.  
the current picture.  
The last-used format for a signal  
The next time the same input and  
the same signal type is viewed, the  
last-used format will be recalled.  
PerfectColor™  
and PerfecTint™ seem out of balance,  
Reset  
(for the single  
input currently  
being watched)  
When the color intensities 1. While viewing the input to be reset,  
All PerfectColor/PerfecTint sliders  
are reset to the original center  
position. The PefectColor/  
PerfecTint settings for other inputs  
remain unchanged.  
press VIDEO repeatedly to cycle to the  
PerfectColor™ option.  
use the PerfectColor/  
PerfecTint reset to reset  
the color balances to the  
original factory settings.  
Both PerfectColor and  
PerfecTint and are reset  
at the same time.  
2. Press ENTER to display the PerfectColor  
menu.  
3. Press CANCEL to reset the colors.  
A/V Memory  
Reset  
(for the single  
input currently  
being watched)  
When audio and/or video 1. While viewing the input to be reset,  
All Audio and Video settings for the  
individual input are reset except  
for the Listen To, Language, audio  
Balance, and Closed Caption  
settings.  
settings for a single input  
seem incorrect, use A/V  
Memory Reset to return  
the input to the original  
factory settings.  
press MENU to display the TV Main  
menu.  
2. Use to highlight the Audio/Video icon  
and press ENTER  
.
3. When the Audio/Video menu is displayed  
with the AV Memory Reset text box high-  
lighted, press ENTER to reset.  
4. Press EXIT to exit the menu.  
A/V Reset  
(for all inputs)  
To reset audio and video While viewing the TV, press the front panel  
adjustments for all inputs buttons GUIDE and FORMAT at the same time.  
to the original factory  
settings.  
All Audio and Video settings are  
returned to the original factory  
settings, including Listen To and  
Language, plus Closed Captions  
settings and Format settings .  
Channel  
Memorization  
To erase and  
re-memorize channels on  
ANT 1 or ANT 2  
1. While viewing the TV, press MENU to  
display the TV Main menu with the  
Setup icon highlighted.  
All previously memorized channels  
for the selected antenna input are  
erased and a new set of memorized  
channels is created. To add or  
.
2. Press ENTER to display the Setup menu.  
3. When the Setup menu is displayed, use delete individual channels, see  
the Channel Menu instructions in  
chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings.”  
to highlight the antenna and  
reception mode button and press ENTER  
to start memorization.  
112  
Appendices  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
Reset Name  
When to Use  
How to Use  
Resulting Action  
Parental Lock  
Pass Code  
To change your Parental  
Lock Pass Code  
T
his information is listed on the cutout page in  
Allows a new code to be  
established.  
Appendix A. Please refer to that page.  
Front-Panel Lock To re-enable the front-  
When Energy Mode is set to Fast  
Power On, press and hold the MENU  
button on the front panel for over eight misplaced.  
seconds.  
Allows the front panel to be  
unlocked if the remote control is  
Release  
panel controls after  
activation of the Front-  
Panel Lock  
When Energy Mode is set to Low  
Power, press POWER on the front panel to  
turn on the TV. Press and hold the MENU  
button on the front panel for over eight  
seconds.  
System Reset  
If the TV does not turn on Press the SYSTEM RESET button on the front  
The TV will turn off and the green LED  
will flash quickly for about one minute.  
When the green LED stops flashing,  
you may turn on the TV. The changes  
you made most recently, before using  
SYSTEM RESET, may be lost. Changes  
you made previously, however, are  
not lost.  
or off, does not respond  
to the remote control or  
front panel buttons, or  
has audio but no video.  
panel with a pointed object such as the  
point of pencil or end tip of a paperclip.  
TV Reset  
To reset all consumer-  
accessible settings  
and all memories to the  
original factory defaults.  
1. While viewing the TV, press MENU to  
The TV will start the initialization  
process. The TV will then turn off  
and the front green LED will start  
flashing. When the LED stops  
flashing, you can turn the TV on  
again. The Parental Lock Pass  
code will remain unaffected, but  
all other memories and settings  
outlined in this Owner’s Guide will  
need to be set again.  
IMPORTANT:  
Use this reset  
only if all other  
resets have been  
unsuccessful.  
display the TV Main menu.  
2. With the Main menu displayed, press  
number keys 1 2 3 to display the  
Reset Menu.  
CAUTION: All owner-  
performed setups and  
adjustments will be  
erased.  
3. READ THE ON SCREEN WARNING  
AND INSTRUCTIONS.  
If you do not wish to use this reset,  
press EXIT or MENU to back out.  
If you do wish to use the reset,  
press ENTER to erase all memories  
and settings.  
Service and Support  
our website at www.mitsuparts.com or call  
(800) 553-7278.  
Service  
For questions:  
If you are unable to correct a problem with your TV,  
consult your Mitsubishi dealer or Mitsubishi Consumer  
Relations at (800) 332-2119.  
Call Consumer Relations at 800-332-2119.  
Website: www.mitsubishi-tv.com  
DO NOT adjust any controls other than those  
described in this Owner’s Guide.  
Important  
DO NOT remove the protective back cover of your  
TV.  
All lamps replaced under warranty must be returned  
to Mitsubishi where they will be inspected for defect  
verification.  
Support  
To order replacement or additional remote con-  
trols, lamp cartridges, or Owner’s Guides, visit  
Appendices  
113  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
General TV Operation  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. A fan is running even while the TV is powered Normal TV operation. When the TV is off, internal components  
off.  
continue to draw power and must be cooled by the fan.  
2. The TV remote control does not work.  
Check that the batteries are fresh and installed correctly.  
Check that the slide switch is set to TV.  
Be no more than 20 feet from the TV when using the remote control.  
Program the remote control to operate the TV or other device.  
Reset the remote control. See Appendix D.  
3. Whenever I try to use the remote control, the Replace the batteries.  
POWER key blinks five times.  
4. TV does not respond to the remote control or Use the System Reset button.  
to front panel control and TV will not power  
on or off.  
5. When a device is selected from the Input  
Selection menu, the screen is blue (no signal  
source).  
Make sure the selected device is turned on.  
Begin play of the VCR.  
6. Devices are grayed out in the Input Selec-  
tion menu or the Split Screen Input Selection  
menu.  
A recording is in progress. Cancel the recording to select the  
device.  
PCs and 1080p sources cannot display in the Split Screen  
sub-picture.  
7.  
You have forgotten your Parental Lock pass code. See Appendix A, Bypassing the Parental Lock.  
8. Rating restrictions are not working.  
Open the Parental Lock menu and:  
Verify that the U.S. Ratings or Other Ratings setting is On.  
Check the Lock Time/Unlock Time to check if rating restric-  
tions are disabled.  
Rating restrictions apply only to content on ANT 1 and ANT 2,  
INPUT 1–3, and IEEE 1394 inputs.  
9. On-screen displays appear each time you  
Normal TV operation.  
change a function.  
10. Cable provider needs information to start  
On the remote control, press MENU and then enter the numbers  
999 to display the Host ID and CableCARD™ ID information.  
CableCARD™ service.  
TV Channels  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. The TV takes several seconds to respond to  
It is normal for digital channels to take longer to tune in.  
Press ENTER after a channel number to avoid delays.  
Use a 4-digit number for an over-the-air digital channel.  
Use a 6-digit number for digital cable channels if your cable  
service is able to recognize 6-digit channel numbers.  
channel changes.  
2. You cannot access a channel.  
Use number keys instead of CH  
/
.
Be sure the channel you want to view is in memory. See  
“Channel Menu” in chapter 5, “TV Menu Settings.”  
Check that the TV is turned to the correct device or antenna  
for that channel by pressing the INPUT button.  
Make sure the Parental Lock is off.  
If you cannot tune to a virtual digital channel even though the  
TV has already memorized digital channels, tune to the actual  
channel number used by the broadcaster. The virtual channel  
will then be automatically added to memory.  
3. Name options are not available for some  
Only memorized analog channels can be named.  
channels.  
4. When ChannelView™ list is displayed, infor-  
Available information is sent from the broadcaster or cable pro-  
mation appears incomplete  
vider. No other data is available.  
114  
Appendices  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
TV Power On/Off  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. TV takes an excessively long time to power  
When switched on, the TV needs time to boot up, just as a  
on.  
computer does. Also, the TV’s lamp requires a few moments  
to heat up to full brightness.  
TV Energy Mode is set to Low Power. To change TV Energy  
Mode to Fast Power On: Press MENU, open the Setup menu,  
highlight the Fast Power On radio button.  
2. You cannot program the TV to turn on auto-  
The TV may be locked.  
The clock may not be set.  
A time-delayed recording may have started.  
TV Energy Mode is set to Low Power. Change to Fast Power  
On in Setup menu.  
matically (Timer function)  
3. The TV will not turn on after being plugged in. If green light on front panel is blinking, wait for at least one minute  
for the light to turn off, then press POWER again.  
4. TV turned itself off and the light on the front  
panel started to blink.  
Momentary power fluctuation caused the TV to turn off to  
prevent damage. Wait for the green light to stop flashing and  
turn the TV on again.  
If the TV does not stay on, use the System Reset button on  
the front panel. If this happens frequently, obtain an AC line  
power conditioner/surge protector.  
An unusual digital signal may have been received, triggering a  
protection circuit. Wait for the light to stop flashing and turn TV on.  
5
TV will not power off.  
Use the System Reset button.  
Picture  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. Picture does not look like a high-definition  
Not all signals are high-definition signals. To receive high-defini-  
tion programming from your cable or satellite provider, you must  
subscribe to the provider’s high-definition service. Some over-  
the-air broadcasts are in high-definition and can be received with  
a high-quality antenna suited to your location.  
picture.  
2. Picture has become noticeably dimmer.  
Adjust picture brightness and contrast to maximum levels.  
The lamp is nearing the end of its life. Order a new lamp. See  
Appendix C for ordering information and replacement instruc-  
tions.  
3. Split Screen does not display a sub-picture.  
Make sure the Parental Lock is off.  
Not all inputs can be displayed as a sub-picture.  
4. CableCARD channel is not shown as Split  
Screen sub-picture when CableCARD  
channel is the main image.  
CableCARD allows only one channel at a time to be used.  
5. There is a large black or gray rectangle on  
The TV’s analog closed captioning has been set to “text” mode in  
the Captions menu. Turn off because there is no text information  
being broadcast.  
the screen.  
6. You cannot view a picture when playing a  
VHS tape.  
Check your VCR’s owner’s guide for further troubleshooting.  
7. VCR or DVD player’s on-screen menus jitter Possible cause: Many VCRs and DVD players provide on-screen  
up and down.  
menus at only half-resolution. These lower-resolution graphics  
may appear to jitter up and down when the TV converts them to  
high-definition graphics.  
8. When viewing a stopped VCR, white lines  
Turn off video mute for the VCR.  
Begin playing the tape.  
Change the VCR input to the antenna input.  
are rolling on the screen.  
Appendices  
115  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
Picture  
Symptom  
Remarks  
9. Screen is black when trying to view digital  
The PerfectColor™ color balance has been incorrectly set. Press  
VIDEO repeatedly until you see the PerfectColor option and press  
ENTER to open the PerfectColor ™ menu.  
channels or IEEE 1394 device.  
10. DVCR analog/digital problems.  
If the tape is currently playing but no picture displays, there may  
be a mismatch of the media with the display. Press INPUT to  
display the Input Selection menu. Press ENTER for the DVCR  
device. If digital is selected, try analog, or if analog is selected, try  
digital.  
11. Cannot see a picture from a DV Camcorder. DV formatting was not detected during automatic discovery, so you must  
specify it manually. With the camcorder as the current device, open the  
NetCommand menu, select 1394, then highlight the DV radio button.  
Sound (see also NetCommand troubleshooting for A/V receiver setup)  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. There is no sound even when the  
Check if the MUTE button is on.  
The TV’s “Listen to:” setting may be set to SAP.  
Check that the TV Speakers setting is On in the Audio/Video menu.  
If using an A/V receiver, check audio source in Input Selection menu.  
Perform a System Reset.  
volume is turned up.  
2. The sound does not match the screen  
The TV’s Listen to: setting may be set to SAP.  
If using stereo or A/V receiver speakers, check their input selection.  
If using stereo or A/V receiver, check that DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
and/or AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT on TV’s back panel is connected  
to the A/V receiver.  
picture.  
NetCommand® is set up incorrectly.  
Indicators  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. Lamp indicator light is a constant red.  
Turn the TV off for at least 2 minutes. Turn it back on. If light  
is still red, the lamp has failed. Replace it. See Appendix C  
for lamp replacement information. For questions, please call  
Mitsubishi Consumer relations at (800) 332-2119.  
2. Lamp indicator light is a flashing yellow.  
Lamp cover door is open or lamp cartridge is not secure. See  
Appendix C for lamp replacement information.  
3. Status indicator light is a steady yellow.  
Room temperature has exceeded proper levels. Cool the room.  
4. Status indicator light is a steady/flashing red. Service is required. Contact your dealer or a Mitsubishi Autho-  
rized Service Center to arrange for a service evaluation. Listings  
of Mitsubishi Authorized Service locations can be obtained from  
our web site, www.mitsubishi-tv.com or by calling 1-800-332-  
2119.  
Memory Card Reader  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. TV is not responding after pulling out a  
Press STOP or wait until playback is complete before remov-  
memory card during playback.  
ing memory card.  
Turn the TV off for 5 to about 10 seconds and then turn it back on.  
Reset the TV using the SYSTEM RESET button.  
2. Can’t see a thumbnail picture in the JPEG  
menu, or can’t see a track/song name in the  
Playlist menu.  
File does not meet file standards for playback.  
3. TV can’t play or stop a memory card.  
Turn the TV off for about 10 seconds to reset the card reader then  
turn the TV back on.  
116  
Appendices  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
IEEE 1394 Recording  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. Program to be recorded was correctly  
The broadcaster supplied program information that was incorrect  
selected from ChannelView, however, incor- and/or was changed after a recording was added to the Record  
rect program was recorded. List.  
2. Incomplete ChannelView program recorded. Recording device may lack sufficient blank space to make a full  
recording.  
3. ChannelView program recording failed.  
Connection and compatibility issues with IEEE 1394  
(FireWire®) digital devices. This may include too many  
Firewire devices in use at one time, or the recording device  
not understanding the record command.  
Television lost power long enough to lose current clock time.  
TV energy Mode was set to Low Power. Change TV Energy  
mode to Fast Power On. Press MENU, open the Setup menu,  
highlight the Fast Power On radio button, press ENTER.  
4. Cannot record to or from the IEEE 1394  
device, including dubbed recordings.  
To initiate a recording to IEEE 1394 device, press the  
(RECORD) key. The Record menu displays allowing setup of  
the recording.  
The source device for the recording is not powered on.  
When dubbing, the destination device for the recording is not  
powered on.  
The wrong medium (analog tape for digital recording, or  
digital tape for the analog recording) is in the device.  
The program is copy protected.  
The program has already been recorded once and the copy  
protection only allows one recording.  
Unapproved source device for copy protected material.  
The recording device can not decode the copyright signal  
included in the signal source (try another device if available).  
The playing device (for dubbing) does not support copy-  
righted material.  
Source for recording is copyrighted  
Too many IEEE 1394 devices in network. Insufficient band-  
width available. Disconnect unused devices.  
Source Device has higher communication speed (S 400) than  
record device. If possible, reverse devices, play in the slower  
device and record in the faster device.  
IEEE 1394 Devices  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1. Excessive digital artifacts appear when  
The IEEE 1394 cable is too long; 15 feet between devices is  
viewing an IEEE 1394 device.  
the maximum.  
There may be a slow device in the middle of the IEEE 1394  
network. Move the slow devices to the end so that connec-  
tions for faster devices do not pass through them.  
2. D-VHS recordings for digital cable have  
drop-outs (loss of picture or sound), or no  
playback.  
Digital cable signals on IEEE 1394 can exceed the data rate stan-  
dards supported by DVCR.  
3. The IEEE 1394 Device is no longer listed in  
The IEEE 1394 plug is disconnected or loose.  
The IEEE 1394 device has not been powered on. Turn on.  
The device has not been discovered.  
the Input Selection menu.  
The device is not an audio/video device  
4. MENU button does not display a menu.  
The IEEE 1394 device does not provide a menu.  
The TV cannot support IEEE 1394 menus.  
Appendices  
117  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
IEEE 1394 Devices  
Symptom  
Remarks  
5. There is no audio and video from the IEEE  
The device is not turned on. Turn the device power on.  
No media (tape or disc) is inserted into the device.  
The media is blank (has no recording).  
The play command failed - Try pressing play again on the  
device’s remote control or front panel.  
1394 device.  
The device is already in use (for example, the device is cur-  
rently recording).  
The source is copy-protected or violates copy protection.  
The device’s digital video signal is not supported by the TV,  
as may be the case with an IEEE 1394 signal from a com-  
puter. Use analog connections instead, if available.  
The device is not an audio/video device.  
Too many other devices are already communicating over IEEE  
1394. Remove or stop some devices and try again.  
6. The IEEE 1394 device cannot be selected (is  
grayed out).  
The device may be busy with a recording. Cancel the recording.  
You have connected more than seven IEEE 1394 devices.  
Unplug the eighth device and one other device. Plug the new  
device back in.  
7. All IEEE 1394 devices disappear.  
The connected devices must not be in a loop that returns to  
the TV. Make sure a device is connected at the end.  
Disconnect all the cables and devices from the TV. Replace  
them one by one to locate the problem device or cable.  
Use System Reset (front control panel).  
8. An IEEE 1394 device has been plugged in  
but does not appear in the Input Selection  
menu (not discovered).  
The IEEE 1394 connection to the TV or another device is not  
secure or is loose.  
The IEEE 1394 device is not powered on.  
A device in the IEEE 1394 chain is not powered on. Turn on  
all the devices.  
The device discovery can take as long as a minute to initiate.  
IEEE 1394 cable is too long (maximum of 15 feet between  
devices).  
The IEEE 1394 device uses an incompatible protocol and will  
not be discovered  
9. Cannot view video from an IEEE 1394 DV  
DV formatting was not detected during automatic discovery, so  
you must specify it manually. With the camcorder as the current  
device, open the NetCommand menu, select 1394, then select  
the DV radio button.  
camcorder.  
10. An IEEE 1394 device is not responding  
Unplug the device’s power cord. Wait at least ten seconds  
and plug it in again.  
properly.  
Some IEEE 1394 devices are not supported by the TV  
because of incompatible standards.  
NetCommand  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1.  
Cannot see the A/V Receiver menu.  
The A/V Receiver is not connected to any video input of the TV. To check  
the A/V Receiver menu, temporarily plug into an unused input of the TV,  
such as Input 3. Exit the Auto Input Sensing screen and select Input 3  
from the Input Selection menu. Press MENU.  
118  
Appendices  
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued  
NetCommand  
Symptom  
Remarks  
2.  
NetCommand unable to learn specific device  
keys.  
Device does not use IR format for remote control signal. ITT and RF  
formats cannot be learned.  
Room lighting may affect the signal. Have the remotes very close (6  
inches or less) to the TV during Learning.  
If learning a Mitsubishi remote control, make sure slide switch is not  
set to TV position.  
Some, but not all, device key functions can be learned by  
NetCommand. For example, POWER and PLAY may be learned,  
but other functions may not.  
The signal from the remote control may not be strong enough.  
Insert fresh batteries and try Learning again.  
3.  
The A/V Receiver is the selected audio source but Check to see if the A/V Receiver power is turned on. After the power is  
there is no sound.  
turned on, redisplay the Input Selection menu and press ENTER to allow  
NetCommand to correctly select the A/V Receiver input.  
4.  
There is no sound when I switch to the A/V  
Wrong input or no input was assigned in the  
receiver in the Input Selection menu, even though Connect box under AV Receiver Setup in the  
I have physically connected the TV to the A/V  
receiver and learned IR codes for the receiver  
inputs.  
NetCommand menu. All audio should go to the  
A/V receiver as audio output from the TV unless  
the device’s audio is connected directly to the A/V  
receiver. See chapter 2, “TV Setup,” and perform  
the procedure to select the correct A/V receiver  
input from the A/V Receiver Connect list.  
5.  
There is no sound from the A/V receiver for my  
DVD player or other surround sound device even  
NetCommand A/V receiver setup for the DVD  
player or digital surround sound device other  
though I learned the IR code for the A/V receiver’s device is wrong. See chapter 2, “TV Setup,” and  
DVD input or other input.  
perform A/V receiver setup for a digital surround  
sound device.  
6.  
I’ve selected my DVD player or other surround  
sound devce in comobination with the TV speak-  
ers in the Input Selection menu, but hear no  
sound.  
A physical audio connection from the device to the TV is required.  
Connect the left and right audio output from the device to the  
appropriate TV audio input. Now you can hear audio from the  
device through either the TV speakers or the A/V receiver.  
Open the Input selection menu and select the A/V receiver for  
audio.  
TV Guide On Screen (see the separate TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed information)  
Symptom  
Remarks  
1.  
TV Guide On Screen® system shows no program  
listings.  
Program listings are downloaded while the TV is off and the cable  
box is left on. It may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV  
program listings. It may take up to one week to receive all eight days  
of TV program listings.  
Invalid ZIP code was entered at the initial TV Guide On Screen  
system setup. Select NetCommand from the main TV menu, then  
Guide and enter the correct ZIP code.  
Check the connections between the TV and the TV Guide On  
Screen input (cable, antenna or cable box and IR cable). At least  
one antenna connection must be associated with the TV Guide On  
Screen system to receive program listings.  
When using CableCARD™, the cable company may have converted  
the TV Guide On Screen host channel to a digital format and lost  
the information. Connect an antenna to ANT 2 and memorize the  
antenna channels in the TV Setup menu. Add ANT 2 to the TV Guide  
On Screen setup in the NetCommand menu. You may be able to  
download from the antenna information for both cable and antenna.  
2.  
TV Guide On Screen system program listings  
don’t match actual programs  
Incorrect ZIP code was entered at initial TV Guide system setup.  
Select NetCommand menu, then Guide to enter the correct ZIP  
code.  
For cable programs, there may be more than one cable company in  
your ZIP code. Refer to the TV Guide On Screen system manual for  
instructions on the Setup Service.  
Trademark and License Information  
119  
TV Guide On Screen (see the separate TV Guide On Screen® Interactive Program Guide User’s Manual for detailed information)  
Symptom  
Remarks  
3.  
TV Guide On Screen system does not change  
channels on the cable box.  
Cable box is not set up in NetCommand. The TV Guide On Screen  
system uses NetCommand to control the cable box and VCR. To  
correct, select the cable box in the Input Selection menu, open the  
NetCommand menu, and select Learn. See chapter 3, “TV Setup.”  
NetCommand IR emitter is not in place or properly positioned in front  
of the cable box remote sensor.  
Trademark and License Information  
LICENSOR’S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY, ANY EXPRESS,  
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH SUPPLIERS, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
CompactFlash® and CF are trademarks of the CompactFlash Association.  
DCR™ Certification Logo is a trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association.  
Digital Light Processing™ and DLP™ are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
DTVLink™ Certification Logo is a trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association.  
Firewire® is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
HDMI™ the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual prop-  
erty rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited pay-per-view uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disas-  
sembly prohibited.  
Memory Stick™ and Memory Stick PRO™ are trademarks of Sony Corp.  
Microdrive™ is a trademark of IBM and Hitachi.  
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license  
from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.  
MultiMediaCard™ is trademark of Infineon Technologies and licensed to the MultiMediaCard Association.  
The  
logo and the words “Simplay™” and “Simplay HD™” are the trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc.  
SmartMedia™ is a trademark of Toshiba Corp.  
In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.  
and/or one of its affiliates.  
The TV Guide On Screen® system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one  
of its affiliates.  
The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following United States patents 4,908,713;  
6,498,895; 6,850,693; 6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 to Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.  
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability  
of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarantee service  
availability in your area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable for  
any damages in connection with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV  
Guide On Screen system.  
ChannelView™, ClearThought®, NetCommand®, PerfectColor™, PerfecTint™, QuickView™, ViewPoint® are trade-  
marks of Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.  
120  
Trademark and License Information  
Mitsubishi TV Software  
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR EMBEDDED SOFTWARE  
IMPORTANT – READ CAREFULLY: This License Agreement is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or an entity) and  
Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc. (MDEA) for all software pre installed and/or provided along with this television (“Software”). By  
utilizing this television and Software, you agree to be bound by the terms of this License Agreement.  
The Software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions, as well as other intellectual property laws  
and treaties. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
1.  
only with the Mitsubishi television model that included this owner’s guide and owned by you.  
2. RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.  
LICENSE GRANT. MDEA grants you a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right and license to use one copy of the Software  
Software Not for Resale. You may not resell or otherwise transfer for value the Software, except in conjunction with a sale of the TV that  
Software has been pre installed.  
Prohibition on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. The Software contains trade secrets or other proprietary material  
in its human perceivable form and to protect them, you may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or otherwise reduce the  
Software to any human perceivable form, except to the extent that the foregoing restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law.  
Separation of Components. The Software is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more  
than one TV.  
No Rental. You may not rent, lease, lend, or sublicense the Software.  
Trademarks. This License Agreement does not grant you any rights to any trademarks of MDEA.  
3.  
VIOLATIONS. You understand that any use, copying or transfer of the Software, except as permitted pursuant to this License, may  
subject you to serious criminal and civil penalties including damages and an award to MDEA of attorneys’ fees in connection with any  
violation of this License. You further understand that you may be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement or other violation  
of intellectual property rights that is caused, encouraged, or induced by your failure to abide by the terms of the License. This license  
is effective until terminated, and will terminate immediately without notice from MDEA or judicial resolution if you fail to comply with any  
provision of this License.  
4.  
COPYRIGHT. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the Software (including but not limited to any images, photographs,  
animations, video, audio, music, text, and “applets” incorporated into the Software), and any accompanying printed materials are owned  
by or licensed to MDEA. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the Software  
is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and  
treaties. This License Agreement grants you no rights to use such content, except that you own the media on which the Software is  
recorded, but MDEA and its licensors retain ownership of the Software itself. All rights not expressly granted are reserved by MDEA.  
5.  
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. MDEA is licensing the Software for use within the United States. You agree that you will not export or  
re-export the Software. You specifically agree not to export or re-export the Software: (i) to any country to which the U.S. has embargoed  
or restricted the export of goods or services, which currently include, but are not necessarily limited to Cuba, Iran, Iraq, Libya, North  
Korea, Sudan, and Syria, or to any national of any such country, wherever located, who intends to transmit or transport the Software back  
to such country; (ii) to any person or entity who you know or have reason to know will utilize the Software in the design, development, or  
production of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons; or (iii) to any person or entity who has been prohibited from participating in U.S.  
export transactions by any federal agency of the U.S. government. You warrant and represent that neither the BXA nor any other U.S.  
federal agency has suspended, revoked, or denied your export privileges.  
6.  
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE OR IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY  
APPLICABLE TO THE TV, MDEA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE SOFTWARE  
AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH  
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED BY MDEA. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTIES, IN CONTRACT, IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE. BECAUSE SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY  
NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
7.  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. MDEA SHALL NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD  
PARTIES FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR  
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY CLAIMS FOR LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF GOOD WILL OR EXPENDITURES  
MADE OR COMMITTED FOR IN RELIANCE ON THE CONTINUATION OF THIS LICENSE. YOU AGREE THAT NEITHER MDEA’S  
BREACH OF THIS LICENSE NOR ITS FAILURE TO REPAIR A DEFECT, ERROR OR BUG SHALL CONSTITUTE A FAILURE OF THE  
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION  
OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. MDEA’s  
liability to you for direct damages for any cause whatsoever and regardless of the form of the action, will be limited to the  
money paid by you for the TV (based on fair market value of the TV) that caused the damages.  
8.  
GENERAL. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California.  
WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and/or birth defects or  
other reproductive harm.  
121  
Mitsubishi DLP™ Projection Television Limited Warranty  
MITSUBISHI DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC. (“MDEA”) warrants as follows to the original purchaser of this  
television from an authorized MITSUBISHI Audio/Video Dealer, should it prove defective by reason of against defects  
arising from improper workmanship and/or material:  
a. Parts. The lenticular (i.e. front picture) screen is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period  
of thirty (30) days from the date of the original purchase at retail. The lamp and all other parts (except any software  
incorporated into this television) are warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of the original purchase at retail.  
We will repair or replace, at our option, any defective part without charge for the part. Parts used for replacement may  
be replaced with those of like kind and quality and may be new or remanufactured. Parts used for replacement are war-  
ranted for the remainder of the original warranty period.  
b. Embedded Software. MDEA warrants that all software incorporated into this television set (the “Embedded Soft-  
ware”) will perform in accordance with the functional description of Embedded Software in all material respects, but  
MDEA does not warrant that the Embedded Software is error-free. MDEA also does not warrant that the Embedded  
Software will be compatible under IEEE 1394 AV/C and HAVi software standards with products produced by any other  
manufacturer. The limited warranty contained in this section shall continue for a period of one (1) year from the date of  
the original purchase at retail. If, after prompt notice within the warranty period, MDEA determines that the Embedded  
Software has failed to perform in accordance with such functional description in all material respects and if such failure  
is not due to accident, misuse, modification or misapplication of the Embedded Software, then MDEA shall modify or  
replace the nonconforming Embedded Software at no charge to you, which at MDEA’s sole discretion may be fulfilled  
by means of modification or replacement software contained on a replacement memory card for Customer installation.  
The foregoing shall be MDEA’s sole obligation to you under this limited warranty. All rights under this limited warranty  
on the Embedded Software also subject to your acceptance of and compliance with the terms of the Software License  
Agreement applicable to this television, and this limited warranty on the Embedded Software shall be null and void if the  
Embedded Software is modified or changed in any manner except as specifically authorized by MDEA.  
c. Labor. For thirty (30) days after the original purchase at retail, we will repair or replace, at our option, the lenticular  
screen if it proves defective. For certain items that are designed to be replaced by the consumer, including (but not  
limited to) some Embedded Software, the consumer is solely responsible for any replacement labor. For all other parts,  
we will provide the labor for a warranty repair by an authorized MITSUBISHI service center without charge for one (1)  
year from the original date of purchase at retail.  
d. Notice. To obtain warranty service, you must notify an authorized MITSUBISHI service center of any defect within  
the applicable warranty time period.  
e. This DLP Projection Television uses a single DLP chip to create the screen image. This technology creates the image  
using small dots, or picture elements (pixels). Your DLP Projection TV is manufactured to a high level of performance  
and quality, in fact, 99.99% perfect in the number of properly functioning pixels. As in other display technology, some-  
times a pixel is continuously active, inactive or the incorrect color. Our standard is clear; MDEA warrants only that the  
percentage of properly functioning pixels will be not less than 99.99% of all pixels.  
BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE, please review the instruction booklet to insure proper installation and correct  
customer control adjustment. If the problem persists please arrange for warranty service.  
1. TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE:  
a. Contact your nearest authorized MITSUBISHI service center, whose name and address can be obtained from your  
MITSUBISHI dealer, by writing at the address provided below, calling MDEA at the 800-332-2119, or by using the  
support feature of our website at www.Mitsubishi-tv.com.  
b. Warranty service will be provided in your home or, if required, at an authorized service shop, provided that your  
television is located within the geographic territory customarily covered by an authorized MITSUBISHI service center. If  
not, you must either deliver your television to an authorized service location at your own expense, or pay for any travel  
and/or transportation costs the service center may charge to and from your home. Actual service labor will be provided  
without charge.  
c. Proof of purchase date from an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer is required when requesting warranty service. Present  
your sales receipt or other document which establishes proof and date of purchase. THE RETURN OF THE OWNER  
REGISTRATION CARD IS NOT A CONDITION OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. However, please  
return the Owner Registration Card so that we can contact you should a question of safety arise which could affect you.  
122  
d. To obtain a replacement lamp, order the lamp directly from the MDEA Parts Department at (800) 553-7278.  
2. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:  
a. Up to .01% pixel outages (small dot picture elements that are dark or incorrectly illuminated).  
b. Damage to the lenticular screen or Fresnel lens, screen frame, cosmetic damage or to any other damage where such  
damage is caused by unauthorized modification, alteration, repairs to or service of the product by anyone other than  
an authorized MITSUBISHI service center; physical abuse to or misuse of the product (including any failure to carry  
out any maintenance as described in the Owner’s Guide including air filter cleaning or any product damaged by exces-  
sive physical or electrical stress); any products that have had a serial number or any part thereof altered, defaced or  
removed; product use in any manner contrary to the Owner’s Guide; freight damage; or any damage caused by acts  
of God or other factors beyond the reasonable control of MDEA, such as power surge damage caused by electrical  
system or lightning. This limited warranty also excludes service calls where no defect in the product covered under this  
warranty is found, service calls related to unsatisfactory audio or visual reception or signal unless caused by a defect in  
the product that is covered under this limited warranty, all costs, expenses or any other damages arising from product  
installation, or set-ups, any adjustments of user controls (including contrast, brightness, color, tint, fine tuning, sharp-  
ness), other adjustment necessary to prepare the unit for display or use, connection with any external audio receiver,  
antenna, cable or satellite systems, or service of products purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Please consult the  
operating instructions contained in the Owner’s Guide furnished with the product for information regarding user con-  
trols.  
3. ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY NOT PROVIDED HEREIN, AND ANY REMEDY WHICH, BUT FOR THIS PROVISION,  
MIGHT ARISE BY IMPLICATION OR OPERATION OF LAW, IS HEREBY EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED. THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY  
LIMITED TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR.  
4. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY,  
BREACH OF CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE.  
5. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or the exclusion or limitation of incidental,  
special, or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
6. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to  
state.  
MITSUBISHI DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC.  
9351 Jeronimo Road  
Irvine, CA 92618-1904  
Index  
123  
Index  
Connection Types 21  
Copy Restrictions 85  
and NetCommand 81  
and Status Display 51  
Cropped Playback 81  
Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices  
29  
Connecting IEEE 1394 Devices  
17, 30  
Recording 83  
Status Display 51  
A
A/V Discs 85  
A/V Memory Reset. See Reset  
A/V Receiver  
Adding NetCommand Control 44  
Connecting 27  
A/V Reset. See Reset  
Adjust Keys (Up/Down/Left/Right) 48,  
60  
Anamorphic Picture Format 81  
DVD Definitions 54  
Playback 81  
D
TV Connection Speed 30  
Important Information About Your TV  
6
INFO Key Status Display 51  
and NetCommand-Controlled  
Devices 41  
Input Jacks on TV (Standard Audio/  
Video) 16, 73  
Input Name Menu 62  
Input Selection Menu 50  
and NetCommand-Controlled  
Devices 78  
Date. See Clock  
Daylight Savings Time 37  
Digital Audio Out 17  
Display Format Definitions 54  
Dolby Digital 17, 27, 98  
and IEEE 1394 29  
Antenna  
DVDs  
Adjusting and the Signal Strength  
Meter 64  
Connecting 23  
and the Remote Control 48, 101  
and V-Chip Ratings 71  
DVD Player with Component Video,  
Connecting 27  
DVI Device, Connecting 26  
DVI Jack (for Personal Computer) 17  
DV (Digital Video) 29, 30  
Antenna Inputs (ANT 1/MAIN, ANT 2/  
AUX) 16  
Audio/Video Menu 61, 72  
Audio Settings 72  
Auto Input Sensing 38  
Remove the Computer Icon from  
the Input Selection Menu 88  
Remove the Icon for an HDMI  
Device 62  
E
IR (Infrared)  
B
Energy Mode 38  
IR Emitter NetCommand® 31  
Back Panel (illustrated) 16, 17  
F
Batteries 35  
J
F1–F4 Keys 42, 48  
Fan Noise 6  
JPEG Picture Files 56  
C
CableCARD™ 13, 16, 18, 37  
and TV Energy Mode 38  
Cable Box  
Fast Power On (Energy Mode) 38  
FAV 65  
Film Mode 72  
FireWire®. See IEEE 1394  
Freeze Picture 48  
Front Panel Lock 68  
L
Lamp Cartridge Replacement 99  
LAMP Indicator. See LED Indicator  
Lights  
and the Remote Control 48, 101  
Connecting 22, 25, 28  
IEEE 1394 29  
Language  
Audio Setting (Digital Channels)  
73  
for TV Menus 36  
Camcorder 115  
G
Connecting (Analog) 28  
DV (Digital Video) 117  
IEEE 1394 30  
GUIDE Key (button) 48  
“Learn” Feature (NetCommand)  
Description 40  
H
HDMI  
Power 29  
Device Functions 42  
Learn A/V Receiver Input IR  
Codes 45  
Captions Menu 61, 66  
Channels. See also FAV  
and TV Timer 38  
Connecting an HDMI Device 26  
HDMI Inputs 12  
HDMI Jack 17, 73  
Personal Computer with HDMI  
Output 89  
Troubleshooting 118  
LED Indicator Lights  
LAMP Indicator 15  
POWER/TIMER Indicator 15  
STATUS Indicator 15  
Troubleshooting 115  
Lock TV. See Parental Lock  
Low Power (Energy Mode) 38  
Changing 35  
Digital Channel Numbers 97  
Memorizing 36  
Naming 64  
Status Display 51  
Remove the Icon for an HDMI  
Device 62  
HDTV Receiver with Component  
Video, Connecting 21  
HDV video 29  
ChannelView™ Channel Listings 50  
and Recording 79  
Channel Menu 61, 64  
Cleaning 7  
ClearThought® Auto Input Sensing  
38  
Clock, Set Date and Time 37  
Closed Captions. See Captions Menu  
Color Adjustments 74, 75  
Component Inputs (Y Pb Pr) 17, 73  
Computer. See Personal Computer  
Connecting: Helpful Hints 32  
HD (High-Definition Signal) 54  
M
Memorizing Channels 36  
Memory Cards 13  
I
Icon Order Menu 63  
IEEE 1394 Devices  
Amplifier Settings 73  
Analog Outputs 39, 83  
Camcorders 30  
Media Setup Menu 57  
Memory Card Reader 14, 56  
MONITOR OUT Jacks 17  
MP3 Audio 13, 14, 29, 32  
and Memory Cards 57  
Playback 56  
124  
Index  
Mute  
Record Menu (Set Recording  
Defaults) 81  
Signals Available for Recording  
21  
T
Audio  
3:2 pulldown 72  
and Closed Captions 66  
and status Display 51  
Time. See Clock  
Timer (TV Timer Feature) 37  
Time Zone. See Clock  
Troubleshooting 111  
TV Guide On Screen®  
Access Requirements 6  
and ChannelView 79  
and the Record List 79  
Connection Requirements 24, 43  
Description 13  
MUTE key 48  
Video Mute 72  
Recording and TV Energy Mode 38  
Record List Screen 79  
Remote Control  
N
Keys and Functions 48  
Programming Codes (reference  
chart) 103  
Programming Instructions 102  
Programming vs. NetCommand  
“Learning” 101  
NetCommand®  
A/V Receiver Control 42  
Compared to Programming the  
Remote Control 101  
Description 13, 40  
Initial Setup 40  
Input Selection Menu 78  
IR Emitters 31  
GUIDE Key 48  
Recording 81  
Setup 43  
Setup Requirements 40  
TV Energy Mode 38  
Reset 49  
Reset  
A/V (all settings) 14  
A/V Memory (for individual de-  
vices) 72  
DVCR Counter 84  
Pass Code 95  
Menu 42, 62  
Specialized Device Keys 41  
Noise Reduction (Video) 74  
V
VCR  
P
Connecting 16, 24, 25  
IEEE 1394 29  
PerfectColor 74  
Parental Lock  
Remote Control 49  
TV Reset Comparison Guide 111  
Review Screen, TV Connections 43  
Bypassing 95  
and NetCommand Control 78  
Troubleshooting 114  
Video Noise Reduction 74  
Video Settings 74  
Viewing Device. See Input Selection  
Menu  
Front Panel Lock 68  
V-Chip Ratings 71  
Pass Code  
Resetting 95  
Setting 68  
PAUSE Key 48  
and Memory Cards 56  
PerfectColor 74, 75  
PerfectTint™ 74, 75  
Personal Computer 83  
and Display Formats 54  
Connecting 89  
Remove the Computer Icon 88  
Setup 88  
Picture Quality  
and Connection Types 20  
and Film Mode 72  
Troubleshooting 114, 115  
Power Consumption 38, 98  
Power On/Off 35, 114  
S
S-Video  
Connecting 22  
Connector Illustration 20  
Safeguards 8  
SAP (Second Audio Program) 73  
Satellite Receiver  
and the Remote Control 101  
Connecting 21, 22  
SD (Standard-Definition Signal) 54  
Service and Support 112  
Setup Menu 36, 61  
Set Up TV 38  
Signal Definitions 54  
Sleep Timer 49  
Software Version 38  
Speakers, Turning TV Speakers On or  
Off 72  
W
Wall Outlet Cable 22  
WMA Audio 13, 14, 56, 57  
Z
ZIP code 43  
Specifications, TV 97  
Split Screen  
Q
QV (QuickView™) 48  
and Recording from MONITOR  
OUT 17  
Description 52  
R
Recording  
Stand, TV 6  
Standard-Definition Signal 54  
Status Display 51  
STATUS Indicator. See LED Indicator  
Lights  
Stereo System. See A/V Receiver  
System Reset 14  
and MONITOR OUT Jacks 17  
and Split Screen 17  
Cancelling Recordings 80  
NetCommand-Controlled Re-  
cording 79  
RECORD Button 116  
RECORD Key and VCRs 82  
Record List 79  
Website:  
www.mitsubishi-tv.com  
E-mail:  
For questions, call Consumer Relations at  
800-332-2119  
To order replacement or additional  
remote controls, lamp cartridges, or Owner’s Guides  
Visit our website at www.mitsuparts.com  
or call  
800-553-7278  
Demo Mode  
This TV has a demo mode for use in retail stores.  
Demo mode causes the TV to display a series of  
screens outlining the TV’s features.  
System Reset  
If the TV does not respond to the remote control,  
front panel controls, or will not power on/off, press  
the SYSTEM RESET button on the front panel with a  
pointed object, such as the point of a pencil or end  
tip of a paperclip.  
The green LED will flash quickly for about one  
minute. When the green LED stops flashing, you  
may turn on the TV.  
To turn off demo mode:  
1. Press MENU  
.
2. When the Main menu appears with Setup high-  
lighted, press ENTER.  
3. When the Setup menu opens, press to highlight  
the on-screen Demo Mode Off button.  
4. Press ENTER  
.
© 2006 Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.  
853B541A70v2  
Written and Printed in U.S.A.  
V34  

Intel D845EPT2 User Manual
JVC DT V9L3D User Manual
Kenwood Computer Monitor DDX6033BT User Manual
KitchenAid KGCS166GWH0 User Manual
Lava Computer Enhanced Parallel Port Board User Manual
Moffat A25CW User Manual
MSi K7N2 User Manual
NEC A3842 User Manual
Philips 13PR19C1 User Manual
Philips HOSPITALITY TELEVISION 42HF9385D User Manual